Patent Publication Number: US-10315295-B2

Title: Fastener, installation tool and related method of use

Description:
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 
     The present invention relates to fasteners, and more particularly to a fastener, an installation tool and a related method of use. 
     There are a variety of commercially available fasteners that are designed to fasten a work piece, such as a wooden board or a composite element, to a substrate, such as a subfloor, joist or other underlying support structure. In many cases, these fasteners are in the form of threaded screws including: a large, bugle-shaped head to which an installation drive attaches (for example, a Phillips or star drive screw head); a shaft that projects from the head; threads on the shaft, and a conical, sharpened point, which centers the screw on a location, and initially pierces the board so that the screw can advance into it. These types of screws are typically drilled downward, in an orthogonal manner, into the top of a board to fasten the board to an underlying support, such as a joist. Most of the holding power of such screws come from the bugle-shaped head engaging the board. 
     Another type of screw includes the above features, that is, a large, bugle-shaped head that provides holding force, and a threaded shaft. However, instead of a sharpened conical point, these screws include a point having surfaces that meet at an acute angle between 15° and 35° to form a point. The acute angle of the surfaces enables the screw point to drill into a wood structure. While the acutely angled surfaces of such a screw can pre-drill a hole for the screw, the acutely angled surfaces also rapidly cut or drill into the wood. Accordingly, as soon as the first full threads engage the wood, they begin to quickly advance or feed the screw into the wood. This rapid advancement, caused by the threads twisting and subsequently thrusting the screw forward, sometimes leads to inadvertent splitting of the wood via a wedging action of the shaft and threads in the wood. 
     Recently, there have been developments in construction techniques and fastener technology that attach boards to a subfloor or underlying joist with screws, but that attempt to conceal the heads of those screws. This is achieved by advancing the screws at an angle through the sides of the boards, rather than the exposed upper surface or tops of the boards, and subsequently into an underlying support structure. When boards are placed side-by-side one another, these “side angled screws” are relatively unnoticeable by an observer looking straight down at the boards. Of course, at an angled view of the board, where portions of the sides of the boards may be visible, the screw heads may be somewhat visible, but usually not overly conspicuous. 
     An issue with conventional side angled screws concerns their configuration and the manner in which they advance into a work piece. Side angled screws typically include a conical, pointed tip. As soon as this pointed tip penetrates the board, the screw threads bite into the board, and rapidly draw the screw into the side of the board. As this occurs, the screw shaft is drawn between the grains or fibers or pieces of the board (depending on whether the board is constructed from wood or a composite). The drawing of the shaft between the grains or fibers frequently causes the lower corner of the board to splinter from the remainder of the board (if wooden) or to bulge out the lower corner of the board (if composite) due to the wedging action of the shaft and threads in the corner. Thus, conventional side angled screws can tend to damage the corner of the board into which they are advanced, particularly if they are imprecisely positioned or angled, or advanced too quickly into the board, or if the board is weak or dense. Typically, this will reduce the holding strength of the screw, which of course, is undesirable. Accordingly, there remains room for improving such fasteners. 
     To compliment side angled screws which include conical, pointed tips, certain tools have been developed to facilitate their installation. Generally, these tools include a jig, with a plate that sets atop a board to be fastened down, and a bore guide that generally aims the screw toward the side of the board into which the fastener is advanced. One specific tool includes a jig body that rests atop a board, a handle, and pins that extend downward from a flat bottom of the jig body, and that are configured to be positioned adjacent opposite sides of the board. The pins also position the fastened board a distance from the next adjacent board so that there is a notable gap between the boards. The jig body bore guide is disposed at an angle, and generally aimed at a location that is intended to correspond to the side of a board. The bore, however, is located a distance away from the side of the board, generally above the pins, and terminates at the bottom of the jig body. Because the bore terminates at the jig body, its end is located above the upper or top surface of the board, which is a good distance from the location where the tip first engages the side of the board. 
     While this tool can be used to install pointed end screws, it suffers some shortcomings. For example, because the bore guide is distanced from the side of the board, screws advanced through the bore sometimes are placed improperly relative to the lower corner of the board. Accordingly, when the screw is advanced, it can split off the lower corner of the board. Further, if the tool is not perfectly aligned, the pointed tip of the screw sometimes can grab and pull the screw into the board at an undesirable angle, which can cause the screw to bind against the bore of the jig body and slow its advancement, or cause additional wear and tear on the guide. 
     In addition, while the pins of the aforementioned tool can help locate the bore guide, those pins can also be a detriment. For example, the boards usually used in projects are of varying widths. The pins of the tool are joined with the jig body in fixed positions. Sometimes, the spacing between the pins is such that it does not match the varying widths of the board. Accordingly, the tool might not fit properly over some overly wide, “outlier” boards in a particular project. Alternatively, where certain boards are overly narrow, the tool may improperly align the bore guide too far from the side of the board, so that the screw misses the board or splinters off its lower corner. 
     Further, the tools mentioned above typically are used for applications where the boards are spaced a distance from one another so that upon installation, there is a noticeable gap or space between immediately adjacent, installed boards. Where the boards are prone to shrinkage, for example, by the boards drying over time, use of the above tool to install such boards can create unsightly or excessively wide gaps in the structure. 
     While conventional side angled screws, other screws and related installation tools exist, there remains room for improvements to both the screws and the tools to better fasten down boards and other items with fasteners driven through the sides of the boards in a manner that generally conceals those fasteners. 
     SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION 
     In one embodiment, a fastener including an end that pre-bores a hole for the remainder of the screw is provided. This fastener can be in the form of a screw that can be easily and consistently used in screwing operations where the fastener penetrates a surface of a work piece, such as a board or other building material, and optionally fastens the work piece or material to another work piece, article or underlying support structure. 
     In another embodiment, the fastener can be a screw, for example, a side angled screw, including a head attached to a body. The side angled screw can be adapted to be advanced into the side of a board at an angle. The head can include a drive feature that mates with a corresponding drive tool. The body can include a shaft, threads and an end. 
     In another embodiment, the screw can include an end that is generally “V” shaped. The end can include a chisel edge or point that is adapted to engage and scrape a surface of a work piece. Inclined surfaces can be opposed to one another across the chisel edge. 
     In yet another embodiment, the inclined surfaces can be disposed at an angle relative to one another, the chisel edge and/or a work piece into which the screw is advanced. Optionally, the inclined surfaces can be inclined at a negative rake angle when the end is engaged against a work piece. Further optionally, the inclined surfaces can be disposed at an obtuse angle relative to one another, for example, greater than 90° but less than about 180°, or about 135° to about 170°. Even further optionally, the inclined surfaces can be inclined at about 90°±10° relative to one another. 
     In still another embodiment, the screw end can be configured to scrape material from a work piece to pre-bore a hole for the remainder of the screw. Where included, the threads can auger the scraped material out from the hole to ensure there is sufficient room for the remainder of the screw to enter the hole without splitting or otherwise damaging the work piece adjacent the hole. 
     In even yet another embodiment, the screw end can include a thread that merges with at least one of the inclined surfaces associated with the chisel edge. The thread can include a leading portion that is located at or near the inclined surface, and that extends outwardly from an axis of the screw. The leading portion can engage and move chips or other material generated by the scraping action of the screw end, and subsequently auger that material up, along the thread. The leading portion optionally can form an extension of the chisel edge, with the thread beginning immediately adjacent the chisel edge. 
     In still yet another embodiment, the screw end can include a chisel brake point having at least two inclined surfaces disposed at an angle relative to one another. The screw end can act as a brake to retard the feed or advancement of the screw into a work piece for a preselected distance. Optionally, the braking action of the chisel brake point can be partially or fully overcome by threads on the screw engaging surrounding material of the work piece, where the threads eventually impart a forward advancing or feed force on the screw. When this occurs, the screw feeds or advances into the work piece at a faster feed rate. 
     In a further embodiment, the screw end including the chisel brake point can be configured for use with a screw that fastens a first work piece to a second work piece. The chisel brake point can retard advancement or feeding of the screw at least partially through the first work piece. When the screw has advanced into the first work piece a preselected distance, and optionally through the first work piece, the threads of the screw can engage the first work piece and increase the feed rate of the screw. Accordingly, the rate of advancement of the screw can change, due to the configuration of the screw (rather than a change in speed of a tool rotating the screw), with the braking action of the chisel brake point being reduced, and the rate of screw feed increasing in the first and/or second work piece. 
     In yet a further embodiment, a method is provided for using the screw including: providing a screw including a threaded shaft and an end, the end including a chisel edge and opposing inclined surfaces; constraining all but rotational and axial movement of the screw; engaging the screw against a work piece; rotating the screw so that the end scrapes material from the work piece surface; continuing to rotate the screw so that the end pre-bores a hole in the work piece into which the remainder of the screw enters; and continuing to advance the screw into the work piece, with the end continuing to scrape material from within the hole and the threads of the shaft augering the scraped material to eject material from the hole. 
     In still a further embodiment, a method is provided for installing a fastener, for example, a screw having a shaft, threads disposed on the shaft, and a chisel brake point located at an end of the fastener, into at least two work pieces. The method can include engaging the first work piece with the chisel brake point; advancing the fastener into and at least partially through the first work piece; retarding the advancement or feed rate of the fastener into and at least partially through the first work piece with the chisel brake point for a preselected distance; sufficiently engaging the threads of the fastener with the first work piece after the fastener is advanced the preselected distance, where the engagement of the threads increases the feed rate into and through at least one of the first work piece and the second work piece. Optionally, the engagement of the threads with the first work piece generates an advancement or feed force that is greater than a braking force of the chisel brake point, which braking force retards the feed of the fastener. 
     In still yet a further embodiment, an installation tool is provided. The tool can include a handle, a frame, and a tool screw guide or pilot element defining a screw bore that aligns a screw with a desired location on a work piece. The screw guide can prevent the screw from excessively wobbling as it rotates in the screw bore, relative to the work piece, so that the screw can be started in the surface of the work piece and advanced satisfactorily. 
     In another, further embodiment, the tool screw guide can include a spacer that extends downwardly from a body of the guide, and that sets a gap between adjacent boards or other construction materials joined with an installed screw. The screw bore can be defined at least partially within the spacer, so that the end of a screw is positioned and contained immediately adjacent the surface into which it is to be advanced. 
     In yet another, further embodiment, the tool guide can include a clamping mechanism that clamps the tool in place relative to a board or other construction element into which a screw is to be installed with the tool. The spacer can be a part of the clamping mechanism, and can move relative to the frame of the tool. The tool can include another spacer element distanced from the screw guide spacer. The distance can generally correspond to a width of a board or other construction element. The distance can be changed by moving the spacer relative to the spacer element sufficiently to clamp the board between these components. Accordingly, a screw installed with the tool can be precisely advanced into a surface of the board or other construction element. 
     In still another, further embodiment, the screw guide can include a material ejection port in communication with the screw bore. With this port, material scraped, extracted and/or removed from the hole produced by the screw can eject from the port, thereby preventing or impairing the material from hindering screw rotation within the tool. 
     In still yet another further embodiment, the installation tool can be configured to guide fasteners into a work piece having a tongue-and-groove configuration. The tool can include a fastener guide having a bore that aligns the fastener as it is advanced at a pre-determined portion on or near a side surface of the board adjacent a tongue of the board. Optionally, the guide can guide the fastener without splitting, bulging or otherwise damaging the tongue of the board. Further optionally, such an embodiment can be used to fasten porch-type boards to underlying substrates or flooring. 
     In still yet even another further embodiment, the installation tool can be in an automated format including a magazine for storing multiple fasteners and an extension that is joined with the tool guide. The extension can be further joined with a driving tool that can rotate the fasteners and advance them into a work piece as noted with the embodiments herein. Optionally, this tool can include a fastener feeding system that sequentially feeds fasteners one at a time into the guide and/or extension so that those fasteners can be advanced sequentially into the work piece at different locations. 
     In a different embodiment, the installation tool can be configured to install fasteners described herein or other conventional fasteners in boards that are installed adjacent one another with no gap therebetween. For example, where wet, treated wood, synthetic boards, or other materials are used to construct a structure, the boards can be placed immediately adjacent one another so that their side surfaces engage and contact one another, substantially along the lengths of the boards. Due to this engagement, there effectively is no or only a tiny gap between the adjacent boards, in which case, the boards effectively are not spaced from one another a preselected distance. The installation tool in this embodiment can be positioned atop one or both of the boards in the location where they abut one another, and can guide a fastener so that it advances into an upper corner, or edge, or exposed side surface of a board, through that board and optionally into an underlying substructure to secure the board in place. 
     In even a different embodiment, the installation tool can include a frame having a handle and a bottom surface. A guide for guiding the advancement of a fastener installed with the tool can extend through a portion of the frame and can define a longitudinal bore within which the fastener can be controllably rotated during advancement thereof. 
     In yet a different embodiment, the tool can include an alignment projection extending downwardly therefrom, optionally extending downwardly from the bottom surface a preselected distance. The preselected distance can be such that the alignment projection extends downwardly from the bottom surface a sufficient distance to align the guide, and more generally the fastener, with a corner or side surface of a board along a line of advancement, but without the alignment projection establishing a gap between the side surface of one board and the side surface of another, immediately adjacent board. 
     In still a different embodiment, the tool alignment projection can be configured to wedge or position between opposing corners of immediately adjacent boards. The alignment projection can engage a corner of an already-installed first board at a position that orients the trajectory of a fastener guided by the guide of the tool. Depending on the engagement of the alignment projection with the corner of the first board, the trajectory of the fastener can be established. 
     In still yet a different embodiment, the installation tool can be used to install fasteners in wet, treated wood, or boards of different materials prone to shrinkage over time, with no gap between adjacent boards. In the method, a first board can be installed. A second board can be installed adjacent the first board and moved so that adjacent side surfaces of each of the boards engage and contact one another substantially along the lengths of the boards. The installation tool can be positioned atop the second board and a force can be applied to an opposite, exposed side surface of the second board, distal from the first board, toward the first board with the installation tool. For example, with the alignment projection pushing against the opposite exposed side surface of the second board, or an adjacent upper corner of the second board near the exposed side surface, the tool pushes that second board so that the opposite side surface of the second board is pressed or pushed directly against the side surface of the adjacent first board. The tool can guide a fastener into the opposing side surface of the second board and/or an adjacent upper corner of the second board to secure that portion of the second board to an underlying substructure. 
     In this method, the installation tool optionally can be reversed end for end, and used so that the guide is alternatively positioned adjacent another side surface of the second board, generally in the region or plane where the first board abuts the second board. The alignment projection can be positioned so that an outer wedge engagement surface of the alignment projection engages a first upper corner of the first board. This engagement can dictate the orientation of the guide relative to the upper corner and/or side surface of the first board. In turn, this can effectively establish the trajectory of the fastener in the guide bore either higher or lower on the corner and/or side surface of the second board. In some cases, depending on the configuration of the upper corners of the respective boards, the trajectory can be placed either higher or lower on the corners and/or side surfaces. 
     In the method, the installation tool optionally can guide a second fastener into the second board adjacent the first board, thereby securing the second board in place with there being little or no gap between the respective first and second boards. Optionally, this can enable boards to be placed immediately adjacent one another to allow for shrinkage. This can be helpful where the boards are constructed from wet treated wood or some other type of material that shrinks over time or with exposure to the environment. With the installation of these types of shrinking materials, the absence of a gap between the boards, when installed with the above noted tool, can reduce the size of the resulting gap between the boards after the boards shrink over time. 
     In another embodiment, the installation tool can include an automatic feed mechanism that automatically and sequentially feeds collated fasteners to a nose assembly. The nose assembly can include a guide having an alignment projection extending downwardly from the guide a preselected distance. The alignment projection can include an inner engagement surface and an opposite outer engagement surface that merge together to form a wedge. The inner engagement surface can be configured to engage a board corner, to align the angled bore with the corner so that a fastener can be advanced through the angled bore and into the corner at a non-orthogonal angle relative to a top and a side surface of the board. 
     In yet another embodiment, the nose assembly can include a magnetic element located adjacent a collated fastener path along which collated fasteners are advanced. The magnetic element can exert a magnetic force on an individual fastener from the collated fasteners, so as to align that individual fastener with an opening of the guide. This can enable the fastener to enter the opening and subsequently the angled bore of the guide for advancement into the board. Where the fasteners are generally small and/or the bore is small, this can provide reliable alignment for consistent advancement of the fasteners, and can minimize unintentional jamming of the fasteners in the nose assembly. 
     In still another embodiment, the nose assembly can include a collector guide extending adjacent the nose assembly. The collector guide can be configured to generally constrain and funnel the collated fasteners toward an opening or slot in the nose assembly from which the fastener is advanced into the angled bore. 
     In still another embodiment, a method of installing a fastener with the installation tool is provided. The method generally includes providing an installation tool including a nose assembly having a guide. The guide defines an angled bore and includes an alignment projection or wedge. The tool includes a holder that holds a supply of collated fasteners, a feed mechanism that sequentially feeds the collated fasteners toward the guide, and a drive element that rotates individual fasteners of the collated fasteners. The alignment projection is placed adjacent at least one of a corner and a side surface of a board so that the angled bore is aligned with a corner and/or a side surface of a board to advance the fastener into the same at an angle. A first fastener is fed from the collated fasteners into the nose assembly with the feed mechanism. The first fastener is aligned with an opening of the angled bore, optionally with a magnetic force. The first fastener is engaged and rotated to advance the first fastener through the opening and into the corner and/or a side surface of a board. 
     In still even another embodiment, a fastener installation tool is provided including an elongated shaft defining a shaft bore. The shaft bore is configured to receive a drive element rotated by a drive tool. A guide is joined with the elongated shaft. The guide includes an alignment projection including opposing inner and outer engagement surfaces that merge together at a terminal end to form a wedge. The inner and/or outer engagement surface engages a board corner and/or a board side surface to align an angled bore with the same. The angled bore is aligned with the shaft bore, and optionally, the two can be the same bore, so that the drive feature can be reciprocally extended through the shaft bore and through the angled bore while rotating a fastener. This installation tool can be readily joined with a driving tool, such as a power drill, to assist in manually advancing screws into the corner or side surface of a board. 
     In another embodiment, the shaft bore and/or angled bore include one or more magnetic elements. The magnetic elements can be positioned to align the head of a fastener and the head of a drive element so that the drive element can adequately and consistently engage a drive feature of the head and rotate the fastener. The magnetic element can include a first magnet and a second magnet that exert magnetic forces on the head of the drive element and the head of the fastener. The magnetic forces can pull these elements against a wall, and optionally align them in a common plane. When the drive element is advanced toward the guide, even when rotating, it can engage a drive feature, such as a star or other drive described herein to begin rotating the fastener. 
     In even a further embodiment, the installation tool can include an automatic feed mechanism that automatically and sequentially feeds collated fasteners to a nose assembly. The nose assembly can include a guide having an alignment projection extending downwardly from the guide a preselected distance. The nose assembly can further include a guide pocket aligned with an angled bore defined by the guide. The guide pocket can capture and/or guide a portion of a fastener, for example, the head of a screw, and can assist in aligning the fastener with an opening of the angled bore so that the fastener consistently feeds into the angled bore. Moreover, the guide pocket and its interaction with a fastener can prevent the fastener, as it is advanced into a board, from “diving,” deflecting, or otherwise becoming misaligned with the bore or tool, which could cause a jam or misfeed in the angled bore or nose assembly. 
     In yet a further embodiment, the nose assembly of the tool can define a guide pocket having a magnetic element associated with the pocket. The magnetic element can exert a magnetic force on a fastener to move or pull the fastener into the guide pocket so that the fastener positively and consistently registers in the pocket and aligns with an opening of the angled bore in the nose assembly. 
     In still a further embodiment, the nose assembly can include a diverter element that engages a portion of the fastener. The diverter element, optionally in conjunction with a collector guide element, can tilt, swing or otherwise move the fastener so that a tip of the fastener departs from the general path of the collated fasteners. For example, the diverter element can engage a portion of a shaft or threads of a fastener and move the tip of the respective collated fastener outward, away from the collated fastener path and/or longitudinal axis of an angled bore. The diverter element can terminate near or adjacent the guide pocket so it no longer restricts the tip from following the collated fastener path. Further optionally, the tip of the fastener can be drawn into the guide pocket by virtue of flexible material of the collated fasteners, thereby urging the tip and remainder of the fastener into the guide pocket. 
     In a different embodiment, the nose assembly can include a pocket element. The pocket element can include a side wall and a back wall joined with one another. The back wall can be transverse to the collated fastener path and can selectively obstruct it. An exterior surface of the nose assembly, the side wall and the back wall can collectively form a guide pocket that receives the individual fastener and aligns the individual fastener with the guide of the nose assembly, and optionally, an opening of the angled bore. 
     In yet a different embodiment, the pocket element is movably joined with the nose assembly. The pocket element is operable in a pocket mode and a service mode. In the pocket mode, the pocket element is positioned so that the back wall obstructs the collated fastener path. In the service mode, the pocket element is positioned so that the back wall does not obstruct the collated fastener path. In the service mode, a user can service the nose assembly, clearing any jams or obstructions in the guide pocket, or cleaning the guide pocket and/or nose assembly. 
     In still a different embodiment, the pocket element includes the magnetic element. The magnetic element can be joined with the back wall, and can obstruct the collated fastener path as well. The magnetic element and back wall can be moveably joined with the nose assembly so that the magnetic element and the back wall can be moved out of the collated fastener path so that the back wall and magnetic element no longer obstruct the collated fastener path. The magnetic element can exert a magnetic force on an individual fastener to align it with the guide, and in particular, an opening to the angled bore. 
     In a different embodiment, the installation tool is operable in two modes. In a first mode, the drive element and feeding mechanism are fixedly joined with one another so that as the feeding mechanism compresses or moves toward a board, the drive element moves with it, engages a fastener and advances the fastener into a board. In the second mode, the drive element and the feeding mechanism move separately and independently. The feeding mechanism first compresses or moves toward the board until it bottoms out. The drive element does not move relative to the feeding mechanism. With the feeding mechanism bottomed out, a user can apply as much force as desired through the feeding mechanism and to the alignment projection to maintain the guide in a desired location relative to a board, and forcefully pushed against the board. Next, the drive element is moved relative to the feeding mechanism and toward the fastener until it engages the fastener. Optionally, the drive element breaks the fastener free from the collated strip, pushing it into the angled bore, through the guide and into the board. As the drive element rotates, it also rotates the fastener and advances it into the board. Because the feeding mechanism movement and the driving tool/drive element movement and advancement are separate and independent, a user can apply any desired amount force to the drive element and thus the fastener, customizing the applied force relative to the material from which the board is constructed and/or the type of fastener used. 
     In another different embodiment, the installation tool can be operable in either the first mode or the second mode immediately above. The tool can include a locking element to lock the tool in the first mode noted above. Optionally, the locking element can be a clamping device that immovably secures the drive element and/or drive tool in a fixed position relative to the feeding mechanism. Further optionally, the locking element can be a threaded element, cam, collet, or other structure. 
     In still another different embodiment, the feeding mechanism can be joined with a feed extension. The feed extension and feeding mechanism can move together toward and away from the nose assembly, guide and/or the board. The feed extension can be joined with a handle. A user can actuate the feeding mechanism and move the feeding mechanism by applying force to the handle. 
     In yet another different embodiment, the feed extension can be tubular or include a structure that allows the driving tool and driving element to move relative to it. Where it is tubular, the drive element can extend though the feed extension longitudinally to the nose assembly. The drive tool can be joined with a drive extension that is reciprocally joined with the feed extension. A user can apply a second force, different from the force applied to the handle, to the drive tool to move the drive element through the feed extension, and further to selectively and controllably engage and advance the fastener into the substrate, regardless of the material from which it is constructed. 
     The fastener described herein provides a simple and efficient structure that can pre-bore a hole for itself as it is advanced into a work piece. The fastener can be a screw that is easily advanced into a work piece at any angle, but optionally, the fastener is well suited to be advanced into the side of a work piece so that when installed, it is generally concealed from view from a viewer directly above the work piece. Where included, threads of the screw can auger material scraped by the screw out from the hole bored by the screw to promote efficient advancement of the screw and/or to prevent damage, such as splitting, of the work piece adjacent the hole and/or screw. Where included, the chisel edge brake point can selectively retard advancement or feed of the screw to prevent damage, such as splitting, of the work piece adjacent the hole and/or screw. 
     Further, the installation tool described herein can easily and consistently align a fastener with a desired surface of a work piece, and efficiently contain that fastener as it is rotated to prevent excessive wobble. The installation tool also can be securely and precisely joined with a work piece where it includes a clamping mechanism. This can promote accurate advancement of the fastener into the work piece. In addition, when a material ejection port is incorporated into the tool, it can facilitate dumping of material bored by the fastener out from a screw guide, which can prevent clogging of the guide, and impairment of fastener rotation. Where coupled with a fastener feeding system, the tool can rapidly and efficiently install fasteners in a variety of work pieces. 
     Additionally, where the tool includes an alignment projection and is generally void of any board gap establishing structure, the tool can be used to install and fasten down shrinkable or non-shrinkable boards immediately adjacent one another, with no gap established by the tool between the side surfaces of those boards. Thus, when the boards shrink, the resulting gaps between them are not of an overly large, unsightly dimension. Where the installation tool is coupled to an automated fastener feed mechanism, the fasteners can be fed easily and quickly to through the tool to facilitate the performance of large projects where many fasteners are installed. In addition, if the tool includes a magnetic element, that element can consistently and cleanly feed and align individual fasteners from a collated strip with a particular drive path of the installation tool. Further, where the installation tool is in the form of an elongated shaft joined with a guide having a wedge, where the tool easily couples to a driving tool to advance individual fasteners, that tool can provide an uncomplicated and easy way to consistently align and install those fasteners at a desired angle relative to a board surface. 
     These and other objects, advantages, and features of the invention will be more fully understood and appreciated by reference to the description of the current embodiment and the drawings. 
    
    
     
       BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS 
         FIG. 1  is a side view of a current embodiment of a fastener; 
         FIG. 2  is a second side view of the fastener; 
         FIG. 3  is a third side view of the fastener; 
         FIG. 4  is an end view of the fastener; 
         FIG. 5  is an enlarged side view of the end of the fastener engaging a work piece; 
         FIG. 6  is a side view of the fastener engaging a work piece; 
         FIG. 7  is a first side view of the fastener being initially installed in a first work piece; 
         FIG. 8  is a second side view of the fastener advancing into the first work piece; 
         FIG. 9  is a third side view of the fastener as it further advances into the first and second work pieces; 
         FIG. 10  is a fourth side view of the fastener as it is fully advanced into the first and second work pieces; 
         FIG. 11  is a chart illustrating the feed rate of the fastener into work pieces over time; 
         FIG. 12  is a side view of a first alternative embodiment of the fastener; 
         FIG. 13  is a second side view of the first alternative embodiment of the fastener; 
         FIG. 14  is a third side view of the first alternative embodiment of the fastener; 
         FIG. 15  is an end view of the first alternative embodiment of the fastener; 
         FIG. 16  is an enlarged perspective view of the first alternative embodiment of the fastener; 
         FIG. 17  is an enlarged side view of the end of the first alternative embodiment of the fastener engaging a work piece; 
         FIG. 18  is a side sectional view of the first alternative embodiment of the fastener installed in first and second work pieces; 
         FIG. 19  is an enlarged perspective view of a second alternative embodiment of the fastener; 
         FIG. 20  is an enlarged side view of an end of a third alternative embodiment of the fastener; 
         FIG. 21  is another enlarged side view of the end of the third alternative embodiment of the fastener; 
         FIG. 22  is a side view of a current embodiment of a fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 23  is an end perspective view of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 24  is a close up view of the fastener installation tool in use installing a fastener; 
         FIG. 25  is a side view of a first alternative embodiment of a fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 26  is a close up view of the first alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool in use installing a fastener; 
         FIG. 27  is a side view of the second alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool before being placed adjacent a work piece; 
         FIG. 28  is a side view of the second alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool installed on a work piece; 
         FIG. 29  is a bottom perspective view of the second alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 30  is an exploded view of the second alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 31  is an enlarged end view of the fastener guide of the second alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 32  is a first side view of an adjustment element of the second alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 33  is another side view of an adjustment element of the second alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 34  is a perspective view of a third alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 34A  is a side sectional view of a guide of the third alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 35  is a close up perspective view of the third alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool in use; 
         FIG. 36  is a side view of the third alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool as a guided fastener first engages a first work piece; 
         FIG. 37  is a side view of the third alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool as the fastener is being initially installed in the first work piece; 
         FIG. 38  is a side view of the third alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool as the fastener is further advanced into the first work piece; 
         FIG. 39  is a side view of the third alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool with the fastener fully advanced into the first work piece and an underlying structure; 
         FIG. 40  is a side view of a first work piece fully installed with the third alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool and a second work piece placed adjacent the installed work piece; 
         FIG. 41  is a side view of the third alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool including an alternative guide bore configuration; 
         FIG. 42  is a side view of a fourth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 43  is a side view of a fifth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool with fasteners loaded in the installation tool; 
         FIG. 44  is a side view of the fifth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool with a fastener adjacent the work piece, readied for installation in the work piece; 
         FIG. 45  is a side view of the fifth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool with the fastener fully installed in the work piece; 
         FIG. 46  is a side view of a sixth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool with a fastener about to be installed in a work piece that abuts another work piece, where there is no gap between the abutting work pieces; 
         FIG. 47  is a side view of an installed first work piece and a second work piece being moved toward it so the first and second work pieces abut one another; 
         FIG. 48  is a side view of the sixth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool installing a fastener in the second work piece; 
         FIG. 49  is a close up view of the alignment projection of the sixth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool adjacent a first side of the second work piece; 
         FIG. 50  is a side view of the sixth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool, rotated end for end relative to the configuration in  FIG. 48 , installing another fastener at a location where the first work piece and the second work piece abut one another; 
         FIG. 51  is a close up view of the alignment projection of the sixth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool adjacent a second side of the second work piece, generally wedging between work piece corners; 
         FIG. 52  is a close up view of the alignment projection of the sixth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool wedging between alternative work pieces having large radius corners; 
         FIG. 53  is a side view of a seventh alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool, illustrating replaceable alignment guides and an adjustment mechanism; 
         FIG. 54  is a side view of the seventh alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool adjacent work pieces; 
         FIG. 55  is another side view of the seventh alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool including a fastener installed through a corner or side surface of a work piece; 
         FIG. 56  is a yet another side view of the seventh alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool with another fastener installed in another corner or side surface of the work piece; 
         FIG. 57  is a perspective view of an eighth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool illustrating an automatic feed system, nose assembly and optional extension for stand-up use of the tool; 
         FIG. 58  is a side view of the nose assembly and a lateral foot of the eighth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 59  is a bottom view of the nose assembly and lateral foot of the eighth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 60  is another perspective view of the nose assembly and lateral foot of the eighth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 61  is a front view of the nose assembly of the eighth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 62  is a first side view of the eighth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool with the nose assembly, having a front engagement foot, preliminarily engaging a corner of a board; 
         FIG. 63  is a second side view of the eighth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool with the front engagement foot of the nose assembly engaging the board; 
         FIG. 64  is a bottom view of the eighth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool the nose assembly with an alignment projection engaging the corner of the board; 
         FIG. 65  is another side view of the eighth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool with the nose assembly being positioned adjacent first and second boards, generally with the alignment projection wedged between those boards; 
         FIG. 66  is a front view of the nose assembly of the eighth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool with the nose assembly engaging adjacent first and second boards; 
         FIG. 67  is a rear view of the nose assembly, of the eighth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool, removed from the remainder of the tool; 
         FIG. 68  is a perspective view of the nose assembly of the eighth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool illustrating collector guide elements guiding a fastener; 
         FIG. 69  is a perspective view of the nose assembly of the eighth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool, illustrating collector guide elements further guiding the fastener; 
         FIG. 70  is a perspective view of the nose assembly of the eighth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool, illustrating collector guide elements even further guiding a fastener, where the fastener is about to enter a nose assembly opening; 
         FIG. 71  is a side partial section view of the nose assembly of the eighth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool, illustrating the fastener about to enter the nose assembly opening, where the fastener is joined with a flexible strip of material holding other collated fasteners; 
         FIG. 72  is an upper perspective view of the nose assembly of the eighth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool, illustrating the fastener being aligned with an opening of an angled bore of a guide via magnetic elements; 
         FIG. 73  is a front view thereof; 
         FIG. 74  is a rear view thereof; 
         FIG. 75  is a side partial sectional view of the eighth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool, with the fastener aligned with the angled bore of the guide for advancement into the angled bore; 
         FIG. 76  is a perspective view of the eighth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool, with the fastener entering the angled bore of the guide; 
         FIG. 77  is a side partial sectional view of the eighth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool, with the fastener entering the angled bore of the guide; 
         FIG. 78  is a side partial sectional view of the eighth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool with a drive element of the tool penetrating the flexible strip and advancing the fastener into the corner of the board; 
         FIG. 79  is a side partial sectional view of the nose assembly of the eighth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool further advancing the fastener through the corner of the board and into an underlying substrate; 
         FIG. 80  is a perspective view of the ninth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool including a nose assembly, a feed mechanism, an extension and a driving tool; 
         FIG. 81  is a perspective view of the nose assembly of the ninth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool advancing the collated fasteners for driving into a corner of a board; 
         FIG. 82  is close-up perspective view of collated fasteners entering the nose assembly of the ninth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 83  is a front view of the nose assembly of the ninth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool with the fasteners entering a collector guide element of the nose assembly; 
         FIG. 84  is a close-up front view of the nose assembly of the ninth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool with the fasteners of the collated fasteners entering the collector guide element; 
         FIG. 85  is a side view of a tenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool including a nose assembly, a driving element and a collated fastener feed mechanism; 
         FIG. 86  is a front perspective view of the nose assembly of the tenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool with collated fasteners entering a collector guide element of the nose assembly; 
         FIG. 87  is a bottom perspective view of the nose assembly of the tenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool further illustrating an alignment projection and an opening in the lower portion of the alignment projection; 
         FIG. 88  is a side perspective view of the nose assembly of the tenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool with the alignment projection engaged in the crevice between adjacent corners of boards; 
         FIG. 89  is a rear perspective view of the nose assembly of the tenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool with the nose assembly engaged in the crevice between adjacent corners of boards; 
         FIG. 90  is a top view of an eleventh alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 91  is a bottom perspective view of a guide and alignment projection or wedge of the eleventh alterative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 92  is a perspective view of the guide and alignment projection or wedge of the eleventh alterative embodiment of the fastener installation tool engaged in the crevice between adjacent corners of boards to advance a fastener into a corner of one of the boards; 
         FIG. 92A  is a close up view of the wedge of the eleventh alterative embodiment of the fastener installation tool engaged in the crevice between adjacent corners of boards to advance a fastener into a corner of one of the boards taken from  FIG. 92 ; 
         FIG. 93  is a perspective view of the eleventh alterative embodiment of the fastener installation tool joined with a driving tool and a drive element to advance the fastener into the corner of a board; 
         FIG. 94  is another perspective view of the eleventh alterative embodiment of the fastener installation tool joined with the driving tool to advance the fastener into the corner of a board; 
         FIG. 95  is yet another perspective view of the eleventh alterative embodiment of the fastener installation tool joined with the driving tool to advance the fastener into the corner of a board; 
         FIG. 96  is a sectional view of a twelfth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool with the tool in an uncompressed state, holding a fastener readied for advancement; 
         FIG. 97  is a sectional view of the twelfth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool with the tool in a compressed state and the fastener fully advanced; 
         FIG. 98  is a side perspective view of a thirteenth alternative embodiment of the installation tool; 
         FIG. 99  is a close up view of a guide pocket of a nose assembly of the thirteenth alternative embodiment of the installation tool; 
         FIG. 100  is a partial sectional view of the nose assembly of the thirteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 101  is a side perspective view of the nose assembly removed from the remainder of the thirteenth alternative embodiment of the installation tool; 
         FIG. 102  is an upper perspective view of the nose assembly illustrating the pocket of the thirteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener and installation tool; 
         FIG. 103  is an illustration showing a collated fastener path, a collated fastener head path and a collated fastener tip path of collated fasteners advanced by the thirteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 103A  is a cross section view taken along lines  103 A- 103 A of  FIG. 99 , showing a collated fastener path, a collated fastener head path and a collated fastener tip path of collated fasteners advanced by the thirteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 104  is a partial sectional view of a head of a fastener being constrained in the guide pocket as the fastener is advanced within the guide pocket and the angled bore of the thirteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 105  is side view of an alignment projection of the thirteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool wedging fully within a crevice between boards paced immediately adjacent one another; 
         FIG. 106  is another side view of the alignment projection of the thirteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool wedging partially within a crevice between boards placed immediately adjacent one another; 
         FIG. 107  is a perspective view of a fourteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool including a push handle at the beginning of a fastener installation; 
         FIG. 108  is another perspective view of the fourteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool including the push handle further advancing a fastener; 
         FIG. 109  is yet another perspective view of the fourteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool including a push handle, completing advancement of the fastener; 
         FIG. 110  is a bottom view of the fourteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool showing the push handle; 
         FIG. 111  is a side view of the fourteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool illustrating the attachment of the nose assembly to the push handle; 
         FIG. 112  is a bottom view of a fifteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 113  is a front view of the fifteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 114  is a top view of the fifteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 115  is a left view of the fifteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 116  is a right view of the fifteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 117  is a sectional view of the fifteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool in an extended mode with a biasing element of the tool in an uncompressed state; 
         FIG. 118  is a side view of a sixteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool with a pocket element in a pocket mode; 
         FIG. 119  is a perspective view of the sixteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool with the pocket element in the pocket mode; 
         FIG. 120  is a rear view of the sixteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool with the pocket element in the pocket mode; 
         FIG. 121  is a side view of the sixteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool with the pocket element in a service mode; 
         FIG. 122  is a top view of a seventeenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 123  is a front view of the seventeenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool; 
         FIG. 124  is a sectional view of the seventeenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool in an extended mode with a biasing element of the tool in a uncompressed state; 
         FIG. 125  is a sectional view of the seventeenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool in a compressed or installation mode with the biasing element of the tool in a compressed state; 
         FIG. 126  is a side view of the eighteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool, and in particular, a nose assembly and feed mechanism; 
         FIG. 127  is a side view of the eighteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool upon initial engagement with a board; 
         FIG. 128  is a side view of the eighteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool operating in a second mode with the tool pushing against a board but a drive element not yet engaging a fastener; 
         FIG. 129  is a side view of the eighteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool in a second mode with the tool pushing against a board and the drive element advancing a fastener; 
         FIG. 130  is a perspective view of the eighteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool in a first mode with the tool readied to advance a fastener; 
         FIG. 131  is a perspective view of the eighteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool in the first mode with the tool advancing the fastener; 
         FIG. 132  is a perspective view of the eighteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool in a second mode with the tool readied to advance a fastener; 
         FIG. 133  is a perspective view of the eighteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool in the second mode with the feed mechanism compressed and moved toward the board, but the drive tool not yet engaging the fastener; 
         FIG. 134  is a perspective view of the eighteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool in the second mode with the feed mechanism pressed and moved toward the board, and the driving tool and drive element engaging a fastener to push it through a collated strip; 
         FIG. 135  is a perspective view of the eighteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool in the second mode with the drive tool and driving element engaging the fastener and advancing it into the board; 
         FIG. 136  is a perspective bottom view of a nineteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool for use with tongue and groove boards; and 
         FIG. 137  is a side partial view of the nineteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool illustrating the angled bore, shaft bore, guide and alignment projection of the same, aligned with a tongue and groove board for installing a fastener therein. 
     
    
    
     DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE CURRENT EMBODIMENTS 
     A current embodiment of a fastener is illustrated in  FIGS. 1-6  and generally designated  10 . The fastener can be in the form of a threaded fastener, and more particularly, a screw  10  including a head  20  and a shaft  30 . The head can include an upper portion  22  and a lower portion  24 . The upper portion  22  can be of a uniform diameter  23  ( FIG. 3 ), which can range from about 0.197 to 0.202 inches in diameter, or can be of other dimensions if desired. The upper portion  22  of the head can be generally cylindrical and of a uniform diameter from the end of the head where the opening to the drive feature is located, to where the upper portion  22  begins to transition to the lower portion  24 , where it tapers down to the shaft  30  of the screw  10 . Optionally, the lower portion can be in the form of a frustoconical portion. 
     The upper portion  22  of the head  20  can define a screw drive feature, such as a star drive, a Phillips head drive or any other suitable drive. The screw drive feature can define a hole  26  in the head, and can be compatible with any suitable drive feature, as noted above. Optionally, the hole  26  can be generally in the shape of a six-pointed star. The generic name of this type of drive feature is a star drive, or hexalobular internal drive feature, which is standardized by the International Organization for Standardization as ISO 10644. One optional type of star drive feature is a TORX drive, which drive comes in a variety of sizes, generally designated by a “T” and some number, such as T-10, T-15, and the like. TORX is a trade name of Textron, Inc. of Providence, R.I. 
     The particular drive and size of the hole  26  of the head  20  can vary, but as shown, it can be a T-15 size. The dimension from point-to-point of a T-15 hole in screw head can be about 0.128″. The maximum torque range for such a head can be about 6.4 to about 7.7 Nm, as applied via a corresponding tool or head coupled within the hole. The hole  26  can be configured to accommodate a T-15 size TORX drive head. The hole  26  can be quite large, and thus the material  29  between the points of the hole and the outer diameter  23  of the head around the hole can be of a relatively small dimension. In some cases, the material between the outer diameter and the outermost portion of the points on the hole  26  can range from about 0.0325 to 0.035 inches. The hole  26  can be of a depth equal to, less than or greater than the depth  25  of the upper portion  22  of the head having the uniform diameter. Generally, the depth  25  of the upper portion can range from about 0.055 to 0.065 inches. Of course, where drive features, other than the optional T-15 drive are used, the dimensions of those features can widely vary depending on the application. 
     The drive feature can be connected to a rotary operated tool, such as a drill, that turns the head, and thus the screw  10 , to advance the screw into a work piece as described in detail below. Optionally, the screw head can be of the same diameter as the shaft or smaller, or completely absent from the screw, with a drive feature simply included on or defined by the shaft  30  opposite the end  50 . 
     Referring to  FIG. 1 , the shaft  30  of the screw  10  can be relatively cylindrical. The cylindrical portion can include threads  40  which protrude from it and wrap or coil around it. The threads can continue to the end  50  of the screw. Optionally, the threads can end or taper off a preselected distance from the end, for example 0.010″ to about 0.5″, or other distances as desired for the application. Further optionally, as described in the alternative embodiments below, one or more of the threads may be included in the end, possibly merging with and forming a portion of one or more inclined surfaces and/or the chisel edge. Even further optionally, the threads  40  can extend from the head  20  to the end  50  of the screw, depending on the application. 
     The threads can be configured at a particular pitch to theoretically provide a preselected feed rate of the screw into a work piece. For example, the threads may be pitched to provide a feed rate of about 1 to about 8 millimeters per full revolution of the screw about its longitudinal axis  200  ( FIG. 5 ), also referred to as a screw axis. Other thread pitches can be selected to provide other desired theoretical feed rates. 
     The threads  40  can end at a last thread  45  as shown in  FIGS. 1-5 . The last thread  45  can terminate at a leading portion  48 , which can have a thread height  49  ( FIG. 2 ) that gradually decreases until it fades into the generally cylindrical portion of the shaft  30 . Alternatively, although not shown, the last thread  45  can terminate abruptly, with the leading portion of the last thread having a thread height that is generally the same as the threads located above it on the shaft. With this configuration, the leading portion can terminate at a flat, beveled or sharpened forward surface as desired. Optionally, the location of the leading portion  48 , and thus the end of the last thread  45  can vary relative to the chisel point  56 . As shown in  FIGS. 1-3 , the leading portion  48  can terminate and fade or merge into the shaft  30  before the inclined surfaces  52  and  54  begin at the end  50 , or at some other location relative to the inclined surfaces or chisel edge. 
     The leading portion  48  can end adjacent an apex of one of the inclined surfaces  54  as shown in  FIGS. 3 and 5 . If desired, however, the leading portion can terminate much farther up the shaft, away from the inclined surfaces, toward the head. Alternatively, the leading portion can terminate farther along the shaft, generally adjacent one of the inclined surfaces. Further, the leading portion can terminate the last thread somewhere between the opposing inclined surfaces  52  and  54 , rather than at an apex or along some other portion of those surfaces. Other examples of the leading portion are presented in the alternative embodiments below. 
     Returning to the end  50  of the screw in general, instead of being sharpened to a conical point (as with conventional screws), it instead can include a chisel edge  56  which includes inclined surfaces  52  and  54  diverging rearwardly from the chisel edge in a V-shaped configuration as seen in the side view of  FIGS. 1, 4 and 5 . The inclined surfaces  52  and  54  can be at a variety of angles relative to the longitudinal axis  200 , for example 25°, 35°, 45°, 55°, 65°, 70°, 80°, or any angles therebetween that are suitable for the desired application. Optionally, the inclined surfaces  52  and  54  can be inclined at the same or different angles relative to the longitudinal axis  200 . 
     Further optionally, the inclined surfaces  52  and  54  can be disposed at an obtuse angle α relative to one another as shown in  FIG. 5 . The obtuse angle can be any obtuse angle greater than 90° but less than 180°. Nonlimiting examples of ranges of suitable obtuse angles can have a lower limit of about 91°, 95°, 100°, 105°, 110°, 115°, 120°, 125°, 130°, 135°, 140°, 145°, 150°, 155°, 160°, 165°, 170°, 175°, and 179°; and a corresponding upper limit of 179°, 175°, 170°, 165°, 160°, 155°, 150°, 145°, 140°, 135°, 130°, 125°, 120°, 115°, 110°, 105°, 100°, 95°, and 91°. Several further exemplary ranges are between about 135° and about 170°, between about 145° and 160°, and about 130°. 
     Although shown as generally planar elements, the inclined surfaces  52  and  54  can include surfaces that are slightly curvilinear. For example, the inclined surfaces can be slightly concave or convex, or even wavy or serrated depending on the application. As a result, the chisel edge located where the inclined surfaces meet can likewise be curvilinear, for example, concave or convex. Where the inclined surfaces are generally planar, the chisel edge can be substantially linear. 
     As shown in  FIGS. 2 and 4 , the chisel edge  56  and corresponding inclined surfaces  52  and  54  can extend outwardly to an outer diameter  32  of the shaft  30 . The inclined surfaces  52  and  54  can be diametrically and symmetrically opposed to one another about the chisel edge  56 , and/or the axis  200 . In such a configuration, the chisel edge  56  can lie along a line that bisects the outer circumference of the shaft, and can be of the same length as the diameter of the shaft. As illustrated in  FIGS. 1 and 2 , the chisel edge  56  can extend substantially linearly from one side of the outer diameter  32  of the shaft  30  to the other side of the diameter  32  of the shaft  30 , and/or in a transverse manner across a majority of the diameter of the shaft  30  in any desired location. 
     Optionally, the chisel edge  56  can be offset a preselected distance from the diameter of the shaft. In which case, the inclined surfaces  52  and  54 , while being opposed to one another across the chisel edge  56 , might not be symmetric. For example, one of the inclined surfaces might be of a larger surface area than the other. The chisel edge and the respective inclined surfaces, or generally the end  30 , can be void of any cutting edges that effectively cut into a surface of a work piece against which the end is engaged. Instead, as shown, the end can be configured to scrape the surface against which it is engaged when being advanced by a tool, and to act as a brake to retard advancement or feed of the screw into a work piece, as further explained below. Of course, depending on the application, one or more true cutting surfaces might be incorporated into the end  50 . 
     Generally, the screw end  50  can include a chisel brake point  59 , which as used herein, means that the end includes at least two inclined surfaces  52  and  54  disposed at an angle α relative to one another, where the end  50  functions as a brake to selectively retard advancement or feed of the screw  10  into and/or at least partially through a work piece. In some embodiments, the angle α can be about 85° to about 95°, optionally about 90°, further optionally an obtuse angle, and even further optionally, any of the angles noted in connection with the other embodiments herein. Further, although referred to as a “point,” the actual structure of the chisel brake point can include an edge, rather than a true point, that is formed at the intersection of the two or more inclined surfaces. Optionally, the edge extends along a diameter, a chord or other transverse dimension of the shaft  30  and or end  50  of the fastener  10 . 
     One mode of operation of a specific embodiment of the screw  10  and its end  50  will now be described with reference to  FIGS. 5 and 6 . When advanced into a work piece  102 , the screw  10  rotates in the direction of the arrow  101 . With such rotation, the inclined surface  52  can form a rake angle, specifically a negative rake angle X°, which indicates that X° is less than or equal to 90°, which corresponds to the angle α being 90° or an obtuse angle. Thus, when the screw  10  is rotated as illustrated by the arrow  101 , the inclined surface  52  (having the negative rake angle) and/or the chisel edge  56  forcibly scrapes the surface of the work piece  102  due to drag and friction. As a result, the chisel edge  56  and respective inclined surfaces remove material  104  from the surface of the work piece  102  (or the bottom of the hole) via a scraping action. The amount of scraping can be increased or decreased based on the amount of force which is applied along the longitudinal axis  200  by a tool or user. 
     On the opposite side of the chisel edge  56 , the inclined surface  54  also forms a negative rake angle, which can be the same as or different from the rake angle X of the inclined surface  52 . This inclined surface  54  and/or the chisel edge  56  can scrape and remove material  104  from the work piece as described in connection with the other inclined surface. 
     Generally, without a tool to hold the screw  10  on the fixed axis  200 , rotation of the screw  10  and the chisel edge  56  may cause the screw  10  to wobble uncontrollably against the work piece, making it difficult to advance the screw  10  into and/or through a desired location on the work piece. This can occur particularly in instances where the screw  10  is installed as a side angled screw, generally in a non-orthogonal manner into a surface of a work piece. Accordingly, an installation tool  70  as described herein is suitable for installing the screw  10  in a variety of work pieces. 
     Advancement or feed of the screw  10  into a work piece  102  can be further understood with reference to  FIG. 6 . As shown there, with the configuration of the screw end  50 , and in particular, the chisel edge  56 , the end  50  of the screw scrapes material  104  from the hole  103  which can be created by the scraping action of the end  50  within the work piece  102 . The material  104  subsequently scraped from the bottom of the hole  103  can be augered upward, or otherwise away from the end  50 , by the threads  40   a ,  40   b ,  40   c  (which can be part of the continuous thread  40 ) of the fastener  10  until the material is ejected from the hole, beyond the surface of the work piece  102 . 
     Thus, in the embodiment of  FIG. 6 , the screw not only scrapes a hole in the work piece  102 , but also removes the material from the hole so that the screw in effect can be threaded into a pre-bored hole (pre-bored by the screw end  50  and chisel edge  56 ) defined by the work piece. The scraping action of the end  50  can prevent the shaft  30  and threads  40  of the fastener from advancing or feeding too quickly into the work piece or otherwise advancing in a manner that will split the work piece into which it is drawn. 
       FIGS. 7-10  illustrate an example of a screw  10  of the current embodiment being installed in a first work piece  102  and a second work piece  106  to join those work pieces. Generally, the screw  10  joins the first work piece  102 , which can, for example, be a board, to a second work piece  106 , which can be a subfloor, joist or some other support structure. Also illustrated is the material  104  previously augered out from the hole  103  which the screw self-bored for itself. As shown in  FIG. 10 , the screw  10  can be advanced into the board  102  a desired distance so that the head is not too conspicuous when viewed from above. The screw  10  can be screwed into the side surface of the board at an angle β which optionally can be about 15° to about 65°; further optionally about 45° or any other desired angle. If desired, the screw can be advanced at a non-orthogonal angle to the surface of the board, or optionally an angle other than 90° relative to the surface of the board. Again, although shown connecting a board to an underlying joist, the screw  10  described herein can be used in any application where it is desirable to use a screw with a feature that pre-bores a screw hole with the screw itself. For example, it can be used to join corners of boards, used in cabinetry or as trim, particularly where the wood or other materials require a pilot hole to be pre-bored before installation of a screw to prevent splitting, or simply to facilitate advancement of the screw into the work piece. 
     Further referring to  FIGS. 7-10 , a method of installing a current embodiment of the screw will now be described in more detail. As illustrated, the screw  10  includes a shaft  30 , threads  40 , a screw end  50  and the chisel brake point  59 . The screw  10  can be advanced through a first work piece  102  and into a second work piece  106 . As shown in  FIG. 7 , the first work piece  102  is engaged by the chisel brake point  59  and rotated in the direction of the arrow with a tool (not shown) joined with the screw head. A force F 1  can be applied by a user to initiate the screw in boring into the side of the work piece  102  at some preselected angle β, which can be established by a user via an installation tool as described below or some other type of guide or tool. The screw  10  can be advanced into the work piece  102 , and in so doing, the chisel brake point  59  can begin to scrape away material  104  from the hole  103  that the point creates in the work piece  102 . The force F 1 , which is transferred to the screw  10  to bore the screw into the work piece  102 , can be between about 1 and about 35 pounds, or more or less depending on the application, the type of wood or composite, and the type of installation tool. 
     Referring further to  FIG. 7 , the screw is advanced or fed at least partially into the work piece  102 . During this advancement, the chisel brake point  59  bores away material  104  to create the hole  103  into which the screw  10  advances or feeds. The chisel brake point  59 , retards the feed or advancement of the screw into the work piece  102 , and generally provides a braking force to prevent the screw from being rapidly advanced into the work piece  102 . In turn, this can impair and/or prevent damage to the material surrounding the screw  10 , and can specifically prevent and/or impair splitting of materials, for example, wood in the area in which the screw is advanced. As a more specific example, the braking force can impair rapid advancement of the screw into the work piece  102 , which advancement would otherwise typically be generated by the threads  40  engaging the work piece and thrusting it into the work piece, to prevent a lower corner of the work piece  102  from splitting off the remainder of the work piece. As shown in  FIG. 8 , the screw  10  can continue to be rotated, and fed into the work piece  102 , with material  104  continuing to be augured by the threads  40  out from the hole bored by the chisel brake point  59 . 
     As the screw  10  advances into the work piece  102 , the chisel brake point  59  can act as a brake to retard or reduce the feed rate of the screw  10  into the work piece  102  for a preselected distance  77 . This preselected distance can be anywhere from ⅛, ¼, ¾, 1, 1¼, 1½, 1¾, 2, 2½, or more, or less, inches. As shown, the preselected distance  77  is about ½ to ¾ of an inch. Optionally, this distance can correspond to the distance between one surface  108  of the work piece  102  and a second surface  109  of the work piece  102 , so that the feed rate of the screw generally is slowed through a portion or all of the first work piece, which may be more prone to splitting or damage. 
     Further, as shown in  FIGS. 7 and 8 , as the screw  10  advances, and the chisel brake point  59  acts to retard advancement of the screw into the work piece, the threads  40  also can engage the material of the work piece surrounding the bore  103  bored by the chisel brake point  59 . During such engagement, the threads  40  can rotate or move relative to the sides of the bore  103  without substantially advancing the screw into the work piece upon such engagement, or generally without the threads thrusting the screw into the work piece at the theoretical feed rate for which the threads are designed. Optionally, this can contrast operation of conventional screws, where the engagement of the threads of those screws with the material surrounding the screw would typically lead to those threads thrusting the screw into the work piece at the theoretical rate of feed for which the threads were designed. 
     As the screw is advanced the preselected distance  77 , shown in  FIG. 8 , the force F 2  applied can be equal to or greater than the initial force F 1  applied to initiate advancement of the screw. Further, the screw can rotate about the axis anywhere from optionally about 10 to about 100 rotations; further optionally about 15 to about 70 rotations; even further optionally about 20 to about 50 rotations, yet further optionally at least about 25 rotations, as it is advanced into the work piece  102 , until the head of the screw engages the work piece. This can contrast a conventional sharp pointed screw, which typically might only be rotated about five to twelve times, depending on the number and characteristics of threads on the conventional sharp pointed screw. This also can contrast the design of the threads of the screw  10 . For example, the threads may be designed to advance the fastener into the work piece so the head engages the work piece optionally within about 10 to about 20 rotations, further optionally in less than about 15 rotations of the fastener about the axis. The additional rotations of the embodiments to advance the fastener to a desired depth herein, for example, where the head engages the work pieces, can be attributed to the braking action or force generated by the chisel brake point  59  at the end of the screw, which slows or impairs advancement of the screw into the material of the first work piece  102 . 
     When the screw has been advanced into the work piece  102  the preselected distance  77 , a number of the threads  40  sufficiently engage the hole  103  which was pre-bored by the chisel brake point  59 , and the material surrounding the hole of the work piece  102 . Further rotation of the screw  10  in the direction of the arrow causes the threads to overcome the braking force created by the chisel brake point  59 . Optionally, this overcoming of the braking force can occur when the preselected distance generally corresponds to the dimension of the work piece in the area where the screw  10  penetrates or is otherwise bored through the work piece  102 . The engagement of the threads  40  with the hole  103  and subsequent overcoming of at least a portion of the braking force generated by the chisel brake point can increase the rate of advancement of the screw through the work piece  102 , as well as the rate of advancement of the screw into and through a portion of the second work piece  106 . Accordingly, the braking force and subsequent retarding forces and action of the chisel brake point  59  is overcome a desired amount so that the threads  40  advance the screw through the first work piece and into the second work piece at an increased rate of feed. 
     Optionally, the screw then can begin to advance into the second work piece  106 . The rate of advancement or feed, when with the threads overcome at least a portion of the braking force, can result in the screw  10  being advanced or fed about 1, 2, 5, 7, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 and/or 50 (or any range between or above any of the aforementioned values) times faster than when the braking force of the chisel brake point was retarding advancement of the screw. With the threads  40  sufficiently engaging and advancing the screw into the work pieces, the force F 3  in  FIG. 9 , and F 4  in  FIG. 10 , applied to the screw can be less than the forces F 1  and F 2  applied before with the braking force of the chisel brake point  59  was overcome by the forward thrust caused by the threads  40 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 9 , the screw  10  can be advanced into the first work piece  102  and further into the second work piece  106 . During this advancement, the chisel brake point  59  can provide a braking force, but most, if not all, of it is overcome by the feeding force generated by the threads  40  engaging the material surrounding the hole  103 . The chisel brake point  59  also can pre-bore a hole  103  in the second work piece  106 . Material  104  also can be augured out from the respective hole created by the screw in the second work piece  109 . Where the installation tools described herein are used to install the screw, that material can be ejected from a material ejection port as described below. 
     With reference to  FIG. 10 , the screw  10  can continue to advance until the screw head  20  is sufficiently indented in or buried in the side surface  108  of the work piece  102 . In some cases, the head of the screw is completely positioned in the hole  103 , so that no portion of the head extends beyond the first surface  108  of the work piece  102 . Optionally, the screw  10  can be advanced sufficiently so that it is at least partially hidden from a viewer “V” viewing the work piece generally from above. With the screw  10  installed as shown, optionally about 20% to 100%, further optionally about 50% to 90% of the holding force F 5  of the screw  10  is provided via the screw shaft  30  and/or threads  40 , rather than via the head  20  of the screw  10 . Further, where screws  10  are similarly installed on opposite side surfaces of the work piece  102 , with the screws generally pointing toward one another and embedded in the underlying work piece  106 , those opposing screws can cooperatively provide sufficient force to hold down the work piece  102 , with a substantial portion of the holding force being supplied via the shaft of the screws, rather than the heads of the screws. 
     Another feature of the screw of the embodiment herein concerns the chisel brake point  59  and its effect on feed of the screw. Optionally, the point  59  can include inclined surfaces that are at an angle relative to one another so that they provide a sufficient braking force such that the screw does not feed or advance into the first work piece  102  at a rate corresponding to the pitch of the threads  40  until after the chisel brake point at least partially penetrates through the work piece  102 , for example, a preselected distance  77 , or through the second surface  109  of the work piece. In such a manner, the screw can prevent or impair excessive wedging of the threads  40  and/or shaft  30  through the material of the work piece  102  surrounding the screw  10 , thereby preventing or impairing damage such as splitting to that material and the corresponding corner edge of the work piece  102 . With the screw substantially or fully penetrated through the first work piece  102 , its rate of advancement can change, and generally increase, so that it advances at a faster rate into the second work piece  106 . Of course, in so doing, the remaining portion of the screw in the first work piece  102 , including the shaft  40  and head  20 , can be advanced in and/or through the first work  102  piece at a greater rate than the rate before the screw penetrated the second surface  109  of the work piece  102 . 
     In the above described mode of operation, the feed rate of the screw  10  into and/or through the work pieces also can change as the screw is advanced or fed into the first and/or second work pieces  102 ,  106 . For example, as the screw  10  is turned in the direction of the arrow in  FIG. 7 , the feed rate of the screw  10  into the work piece  102  can be a percentage slower or less than the theoretical feed rate provided by the pitch and configuration of the threads  40 . As a more specific example, the threads  40  can be configured to provide a theoretical feed rate of one millimeter per one revolution of the screw  10 . Due to the braking forces provided by the chisel brake point  59 , however, the actual feed rate of the screw  10  can be only 0.25 millimeters per one revolution of the screw  10 . This braking force or action can retard advancement of the screw, or otherwise reduce the feed rate of the screw for the preselected distance  77  ( FIG. 8 ). As more threads  40  of the screw engage the material surrounding the hole  103  bored by the chisel brake point  59 , the braking force provided by the chisel brake point  59  can be overcome by the threads  40 . The feed rate of the screw  10  can increase dynamically as more threads engage the material of the work piece  102 , overcoming the braking force. 
     Thus, by example only, the feed rate of the screw into the work piece  102 , after the chisel brake point  59  has advanced a preselected distance  77  into the work piece  102 , can increase from 0.25 millimeters per one revolution (which is caused by the braking force of the chisel brake point) up to 1.0 millimeter per one revolution, which again can be the theoretical feed rate of the screw based on the pitch of the threads  40 . When the screw  10  penetrates through the other surface  109  of the work piece  102 , it can be advanced at a feed rate of about one millimeter per revolution. Accordingly, when it enters the second work piece  106  it can be advanced at the full theoretical feed rate, or at some percentage, for example, about 70%, 80% or 90%, of the full feed rate. 
     In general, the feed rate of the screw  10  into the work piece  102  can dynamically change from a first feed rate to a greater, second feed rate as the screw enters the work piece, nearing the preselected distance  77 . This can occur because additional threads  40  of the screw  10  begin to engage the material around the hole pre-bored by the chisel brake point  59 . As more threads engage the work piece  102 , the forward force/thrust provided by those threads begins to overcome the braking force provided by the chisel brake point  59 . 
     The aforementioned mode of operating the fastener  10  of the current embodiment and screw features also yields a suitable method for installing a fastener to join a first work piece with a second work piece. In this method, a fastener  10  is provided. The fastener can be the screw of any of the embodiments herein, having a chiseled brake point  59  and threads  40 , where the threads are configured to advance the fastener  10  at a first feed rate, which for the sake of this example, can be a theoretical feed rate. The fastener  10 , and in particular, the chiseled brake point  59  can be rotated and brought into engagement with the first work piece  102  as it is rotated. Initially, the chiseled break point can penetrate the side surface of the work piece, as generally shown in  FIG. 7 . 
     Optionally, the screw  10  can be held with an installation tool at a preselected angle, and generally aimed at the angle β at the side surface  108  of the work piece  102 . The installation tool can also engage the head or other portions of the screw to rotationally restrain the fastener as it is advanced, and generally to prevent or impair excessive wobble of the screw in so doing. In general, the installation tool or some other driver, such as a drill, can rotate the fastener. 
     The fastener  10  can be advanced into the first work piece  102  at a second feed rate, less than the first feed rate, due to the chisel brake point  59  retarding advancement of the fastener  10  into the work piece  102  and providing a braking force that reduces the first feed rate of the fastener into the work piece to the second feed rate, or more generally impairing the fastener from increasing its feed rate to the theoretical feed rate of the screw  10 . 
     Returning to the method, the chisel break point  59  can pre-bore a hole in the first work piece  102  and the second work piece  106 . When the fastener is advanced so that it extends through the first work piece and engages the second work piece, the hole  103  generally is completely bored through the first work piece. The diameter of that hole  103  can be about the size of the widest diameter of dimension of the chisel brake point  59 , but smaller than the outer diameter of the threads  40  of the fastener so that those threads can still bite into the material surrounding the hole and alter the feed rate of the fastener as described herein. 
     When the fastener  10  begins to advance and continues to advance into the second work piece as shown in  FIG. 9 , the threads  40  of the fastener generally pull the remaining shaft  30  (if any) above the threads, and the head  20  of the fastener into and/or through the pre-bored hole until rotation ends and the fastener achieves a desired depth of installation in the work pieces. As shown in  FIG. 10 , the fastener can be advanced so that the threads  40  are substantially located in the second work piece  106 , but not the first work piece  102 . The shaft  30  and head  20  of the fastener  10 , however, can remain in the first work piece as the fastener  10  also continues to advance into the second work piece  106 . As a result, the head  20  and optionally the shaft  30  can pull down the first work piece  102  into further securing engagement with the second work piece, and can further pull the second work surface  109  toward and into engagement with the first work surface  107 . 
     Generally, the aforementioned depth of installation corresponds to the fastener head  20  being at least partially located, if not fully located within the pre-bored hole  103 . The head  20  also can be generally concealed from view for a viewer V from above. For example, the head can be sufficiently buried in or located within the interior of the pre-bored holed in the first work piece so that it is not readily visible to a viewer V from above without close inspection. Sometimes, where the work piece is constructed from wood or composites, the material around the pre-bored hole may swell or at least partially fill the pre-bored hole above the head back in to even further conceal the head of the fastener  10 . 
     The depth of the fastener  10  in the work pieces after installation also can correspond to a sufficient portion of the threads  40 , and shaft  30  if desired, being located within the second work piece, and a sufficient portion of the shaft, as well as the head  20 , being located in the first work piece, where the fastener joins the first and second work pieces to one another. 
     A chart illustrating the feed rates as the screw  10  is advanced is presented in  FIG. 11 . There, the y-axis represents the feed rate in millimeters of advancement into the work piece per revolution. The x-axis represents the passage of time as the fastener is installed, starting from when the fastener first engages the first work piece at T 0 , where time is equal to zero, to when the fastener is fully installed at TE. The theoretical feed rate TFR, also referred to as a first feed rate herein, is a function of the geometry of the thread, and more particularly, the pitch and/or angle of the threads as explained above. As shown in  FIG. 11 , during time T 0 , as the fastener is initially rotated, it begins to engage the work piece, so it does not feed into the work piece. 
     As the fastener  10  continues to rotate and penetrate into the work piece, the threads  40  engage the work piece. Generally, however, the threads during time T 2  do not substantially advance the fastener  10  into the work piece. Much of the advancement, or the feed rate F 2  in general, is due to the force being applied to the fastener through the head. Some or a small part of the advancement can be provided by the threads during T 2 . During T 2 , the chisel brake point  59  can pre-bore the hole for the remainder of the fastener. 
     The fastener  10  can continue to be rotated and advanced at feed rate F 2  a preselected distance  77  ( FIG. 8 ) into the work piece  102 , with progressively more of the threads  40  of the fastener  10  engaging the work piece until that engagement of the threads with the work piece at least partially, if not substantially, overcomes the braking force. At about that point, the advancement of the fastener  10  can generally increase from the second feed rate F 2  to a greater third feed rate F 3 , that is optionally between the second feed rate F 2  and the first feed rate TFR. This increase in the feed rate is generally represented in  FIG. 11  between the transition between F 2  and F 3 . While the transition between the feed rates is shown as abrupt, it can occur gradually if desired. 
     The fastener  10  can continue to advance until it extends through the first work piece and engages the second work piece. Shortly after it engages the second work piece, the rate of advancement of the fastener can further increase, transitioning from the third feed rate F 3  to the fourth feed rate F 4 . This increase can be due to many, if not all of the threads  40  engaging the work piece(s) to advance the fastener into the work piece(s). The fastener  10  can continue to be advanced at the fourth feed rate F 4  that is optionally between the third feed rate and the first feed rate TFR, and optionally at or near the first feed rate or TFR. 
     In operating at the fourth feed rate F 4 , the fastener  10  can be advanced into the first surface  107  of the second work piece  106  as shown in  FIG. 8 . Generally, the fastener can be advanced into the second work piece, which can be an underlying work piece, such as a floor joist at a faster feed rate, such as the TFR because there is not much concern of splitting or damaging that structure as a result of the screw shaft being wedged or quickly advanced into the material of that work piece. Optionally, the fastener  10  can be advanced into the second work piece parallel to the longitudinal length of the second work piece. When the fastener is fully installed in the work pieces, the advancement stops, which is represented at TE in  FIG. 11 . 
     Generally, the changes from one feed rate to another as mentioned above can occur due to the geometry and interaction of the chisel brake point, threads and head of the fastener with one another and/or the work piece(s), rather than due to changes in the external forces F 1 , F 2 , F 3 , F 4  or other forces applied to the fastener as it is advanced. Indeed, the forces F 1 , F 2 , F 3  and F 4  can be substantially the same throughout the advancement of the fastener into the work pieces. Likewise, the rate of revolutions per minute (RPMs) of the fastener can remain generally the same throughout the advancement of the fastener in to the work pieces. What can change however, is how fast the fastener advances under those RPMs, again, due to the geometry of the fastener and the interaction of its components. 
     Although the different feed rates F 2 , F 3  and F 4  are shown as transitioning from one to the other rather abruptly, those feed rates can transition from one to the other gradually, so that the transitions are less stepped. This can be achieved by varying the geometry of the threads, the chisel brake point, and or other features as desired. 
     I. First Alternative Fastener Embodiment 
     A first alternative embodiment of the fastener is illustrated in  FIGS. 12-17  and generally designated  110 . This embodiment is similar to the above embodiment above in construction and operation with a few exceptions. 
     To begin, the end  150  of the fastener can include a different thread geometry and inclined surface configuration. For example, the end  150  can include a chisel edge  156  that extends across the diameter  132  (or some other chord or dimension) of the shaft  130 . The chisel edge  156  can be in the form of and function like the chisel brake point explained above if desired. However, the chisel edge  156  also can extend slightly beyond the outer diameter  132  of the shaft  130  as shown in  FIGS. 15 and 16  by a distance  137 . In so doing, at least a portion of the last thread  146 , for example, the leading portion  148 , can form part of the chisel edge  156 , or more generally the chisel brake point. With the last thread  146  forming this extension, the chisel edge  156  can be configured asymmetrically about the longitudinal axis  200 . For example, a first portion of the chisel edge  156  can extend a first distance D 1  from the longitudinal axis on one side of the axis, and a second portion located on the opposite side of the longitudinal axis can extend a second distance D 2  on the other side of the longitudinal axis  200 . The distance D 1  generally can be greater than distance D 2 . This difference in the distances can be equal to the depth of the last thread, or some other dimension as desired. 
     The chisel edge  156  extends rearward from the very end of the fastener  150  generally in a V-shape with the inclined surfaces  152  and  154  inclined relative to one another at an angle: which can be in the range of about 90° to about 105°, or optionally about 90° to about 135°, or further optionally about 90° to about 150°, or even further optionally 90°±10°. It has been discovered that with these ranges of angles incorporated into the chisel edge, the fastener  110  can pre-bore holes well into composite work pieces, as well as fiber or natural wood work pieces. For example, this range of angles is blunt enough so that it can slow or retard advancement of the screw into a wood board, and allow a hole to be pre-bored therein. Substantially more acute angles, where: is less than 45°, on the other hand, can be too pointed, and can cause the fastener to rapidly drill into the wood board, almost at, if not at, the theoretical feed rate of the fastener and related threads. In turn, this rapid advancement of the fastener can split or damage the work piece. 
     The above range of angles is also sharp enough so that the end of the fastener can pre-bore a hole, rather than melt a hole in a work piece, such as a board, that is constructed from composites, such as a polymer or plastic or wood/plastic hybrid. Substantially more obtuse angles, where: is greater than 170°, on the other hand, can be too blunt, and can cause the fastener end to simply melt a hole into the wood work piece, at a feed rate that is unsatisfactory for practical use. In addition, the melting of the work piece material can rapidly gum up the threads of the fastener, and prevent the melted material from ever making it to the surface of the work piece. In turn, this can cause the surrounding material to bulge and present aesthetic issues. 
     Returning to  FIGS. 15-17 , the inclined surfaces  152  and  154  can intersect at the chisel edge  156  and form at least portion of it. One or more of the inclined surfaces can transition to or merge with the last thread  146 . More particularly, the last thread  146  can form at least a part of, and lie in the same plane or curvilinear surface as, one or more of the inclined surfaces  154 . Depending on the angle of the inclined surface  154  relative to the longitudinal axis  200  or the other surface, more or less of the last thread  146  can form a part of that surface. 
     Optionally, the inclined surfaces  152  and  154  can be located between a boundary  116  on the shaft  130  and the chisel edge  156  as illustrated in  FIGS. 12-14 . The boundary  116  can mark the location at which one or both of the inclined surfaces begin on the shaft  130  or within the end  150  of the fastener  110 . Where included, the thread  140  and/or last thread  146  also can be formed beyond the boundary  116 , in the end, between the boundary and the chisel edge or chisel brake point. Optionally, these threads can also extend rearward from that location toward the head in a continuous, generally uninterrupted manner as well. 
     As shown in  FIGS. 15 and 16 , the last thread  146  merges or transitions into the inclined surface  154  at the intersecting portion  147  of these elements. This intersecting portion  147  can lie within the same plane or curvilinear surface as the inclined surface  154 , and can form a continuous surface with the inclined surface  154  as illustrated. The intersecting portion  147  can extend the inclined surface  154  beyond the shaft  130  a distance equal to the depth of the last thread  146 , the leading portion  148 , or some other distance. Thus, with this intersecting portion acting as extension of the inclined surface, the inclined surface  154  can have a greater surface area than the opposing inclined surface  152 . Optionally, although not shown, a part of the last thread can extend beyond the chisel edge  156 , in which case, that part can form a portion, and optionally another surface extension of the other inclined surface  152  as well. 
     Returning to  FIGS. 15-17 , the last thread  146  can include a leading portion  148  at which the last thread terminates. The leading portion  148  can be the part of the last thread that actually merges or transitions directly into the inclined surface(s), and can include at least a portion of or overlap the intersecting portion  147 . The leading portion  148  can extend all the way to the chisel edge  156 , or it can extend somewhat beyond the chisel edge and form part of the other inclined surface  152 , or it can terminate somewhere adjacent the inclined surface  154 , and/or the inclined surface  52 . 
     The leading portion  148  can extend outward from the shaft  130  the full depth of the other threads  140 , or some other preselected greater or lesser depth. The leading portion can transition rearward from the chisel edge  156  to the remainder of the last thread  146 , which in turn furls or coils around the shaft  130  at or near the end  150 , depending on the thread configuration, and transitions to the other threads  140  extending outward from the shaft. The leading portion  148 , the last thread  146  and the other threads  140  can form a unitary thread that extends from the chisel edge  156  continuously up the shaft  130  optionally without any interruptions or voids in the thread, until it terminates somewhere in a middle region of the shaft  130 . 
     Optionally, the threads  140 ,  146  and fastener  110  in general can be void of any self-tapping grooves or discontinuities that assist the fastener initially penetrating a very dense material, such as a metal. The upper and lower thread surfaces  141 A and  141 B of the last thread  146  and the remaining threads  140  likewise can be continuous from the chisel point to the end of the threads  140  in the middle region of the fastener  110 . Of course, if voids or interruptions are desired in the threads for certain applications, they can be included. 
     Further optionally, the last thread  146  can merge with the inclined surface at the leading portion  148 , with the last thread and all threads terminating at that location. As an example, there may be no additional thread or threads or portions of threads located between the chisel edge and the leading portion. 
     As shown in  FIG. 17 , the leading portion  148  optionally also can include a forward surface  148 A which generally is located adjacent and forms a part of the lower thread surface  141 B. The forward surface  148 A can generally be inclined or effect relative to the axis optionally by about 0° to about 45°, further optionally about 2° to 10°. The forward surface  148 A optionally can extend all the way to and generally intersect the chisel edge  156 . Opposite the inclined surface  154 , in some applications, the forward surface  148 A can also form a partial extension of the chisel edge  156 . If desired, the forward surface  148 A can form a ramp from a location at or adjacent the chisel edge  156 . This ramp can operate to scrape material from the bottom of the hole  103 . This ramp also can operate to scoop or route material  104  adjacent the shaft  130 , can be onto the lower thread surface  141 B. As the fastener turns, the scooped material augered farther up the lower thread surface  141 B. 
     The fastener of this first alternative embodiment as shown in  FIG. 12  can be of a length  144 , and generally divided into a first portion  142  and second portion  143 . Optionally, the length  144  can be about 1.5 to about 2.0 inches, optionally about 1.8 inches, with the first portion  142  being about half the length  144  and the second portion  143  being about half the length as well. Of course, the screw may be of various other lengths, for example, it can be 2 inches, 3 inches, 4 inches or other increments therebetween depending on the application. Further, the first and second portions  142  and  143  can be subdivided in different ratios depending on the application. 
     The first portion  142  can include primary threads  140  and the chisel edge  156  described above. The first portion  142  can be about half the length  144  of the fastener, or about a or ¼ the length of the screw, or other portions as desired. The second portion  143  can be threadless and can include an optional head  120  of the fastener  110 . The outside primary threads near the end  150  can be less sharp than the threads closer to the head  120  of the screw if desired to prevent the or impair those threads from biting into and advancing the fastener into the work piece at an undesired rate. Of course, the threads can be uniformly sharp from end to end. The pitch of the threads  140  optionally can be about 2 mm to about 4 mm, and further optionally about 3 mm. Generally, as used herein, the pitch refers to distance from one point on the thread to the corresponding point on an adjacent thread measured parallel to the axis  200 . 
     The threads  140  and the last thread  146  can be of a thread design having a “V” profile or a buttress profile depending on the application. Further, as shown in  FIG. 12 , the threads and last thread can each include a thread angle Ø, which is generally the included angle formed between the upper and lower thread surfaces  141 A and  141 B. This angle can be optionally between 10° and 90°, further optionally between 30° and 70°, and still further optionally between 55° and 60°, and even further optionally about 60°. 
     The threads  40  each can also include crests  111  and roots  112  between each crest of the threads. As shown in  FIGS. 12 and 16 , the last thread can include a crest  113 . This crest  113  can continue to the leading portion  148 , or can terminate short of it as desired. The crest  113 , and more generally the last thread  146  also can thin substantially in the intersecting portion  147  where the last thread  146  merges or transitions into the inclined plane  156 . Indeed, the inclined surface  154  and intersecting portion  147  can extend outward to the crest  113 , such that the planar, curved or other surface of the inclined surface and/or intersecting portion terminates at the crest  113  for at least a portion, if not all of the last thread  146  and/or the leading portion  148 . 
     As illustrated in  FIG. 16 , the inclined surface  154 , and more particularly the intersecting portion  147 , can form a part of the last thread where the last thread merges into these elements. For example, the last thread in this region can generally include the lower thread surface  141 B on one side of the crest  113  of the last thread, and can include the intersecting portion  147  that merges with the inclined surface  154  on the opposite side of the crest  113  of the last thread  146 . As the last thread  146  furls or coils away from the leading portion  148  or the chisel edge  156 , the inclined surface  154  and/or intersecting portion  147  themselves can merge or transition to the upper thread surface  141 A in the transition region  115 . This transition can be abrupt, with a perceivable drop off from the inclined surface  154  and/or intersecting portion  147  to the upper thread surface  141 A, or it can be gradual, with inclined surface  154  and/or intersecting portion  147  angling or curving away from the upper thread surface  141 A at a small angle or curvature. 
     While the second portion  143  can be unthreaded, it optionally can include secondary threads  145  as shown. These secondary threads  145  can be included on the shaft  130  at or near the head and can extend a predetermined distance within the second portion  143  of the length of the screw  110 . The primary threads  140  and secondary threads  145  can be separated by a void located along the shaft  130 . the void can be of a preselected length  149 . 
     The secondary threads  145  can be of the same threading as the primary threads  140 , or alternatively can include a reverse thread, generally running in the opposite direction of the threads  140  in the first portion  142 . The pitch on the secondary threads  145  optionally can be about 2 mm to about 4 mm, and further optionally about 3 mm. The pitch on the secondary threads  145  can be about 1.5 to 2 times greater than the pitch on the primary threads  340 , in addition to being reverse threaded along the shaft  130 . Further, the outer diameter D 3  of the reverse threads  145  can include an outer diameter that is smaller than the outer diameter D 4  of the primary threads  140 . As an example, the outer diameter of the reverse threads can be about 1.4 inches, and the outer diameter of the primary threads can be about 1.6 inches. Optionally, the outer diameter of reverse threads  145  can be about 0.1 to about 0.4 inches less than the outer diameter of the primary threads  140 . 
     The head  120  of the fastener shown in  FIG. 12  optionally can be of a diameter D 5  that is greater than the other diameters D 3  and D 4 . This larger size of the head can enable a drive tool to be attached to the head and driven. The larger size of the head can also enable the head to engage the material surrounding the pre-bored hole  103  and provide some holding force, in addition to the shaft, to hold the work pieces in a desired orientation. 
     In operation, the screw  110  can function and can be installed in a manner similar to the embodiments described above. Where the leading portion  148  and last thread  146  terminate adjacent or near one or more of the inclined surfaces, however, these features can provide enhanced augering. For example, as shown in  FIG. 17 , as the material  104  is scraped from the work piece within the pre-bored hole  103 , the small pieces of material, which can be in the form of chips, fragments, fibers, or parts of the work piece are scraped from the bottom of the hole by the leading portion  148 . In effect, these parts can be scooped or picked up by the leading portion  148  and the last thread  146 , and where included, the forward surface  148 A, and augered up the last thread to the other threads  140 . The material  104  can travel on the lower thread surface  141 B as illustrated, generally continuously up the threads until it is ejected out from the hole to the environment or into a tool as described below. 
     In applications where the work piece into which the fastener  110  is advanced is a composite board, the scooping and scraping action of the leading portion and end  150  can almost immediately auger out the material  104  from the pre-bored hole. This can prevent melting of that composite material due to excessive churning in the bottom of the hole, which in turn can prevent the screw from becoming gummed up with the melted material as it is augered up the threads, thereby impairing advancement of the screw into the composite. 
       FIG. 18  illustrates the fastener  110  installed in work pieces  102  and  106  at a predetermined angle, much like the embodiment described above. Leading up to that installation, the fastener  110  can undergo the operations, can be installed at the angles, and can feed at the feed rates as described in any of the embodiments herein to connect the work pieces  102  and  106 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 18 , however, the optional additional secondary threads  145  can provide a slightly different holding effect than that of the embodiments described above. For example, where the secondary threads  145 , which again may be reverse threads, are included, those reverse threads can assist in drawing the work piece  102  more toward the second work piece  106 . Further because there is a void between the primary threads and the secondary threads, that void can allow the first work piece  102  to draw down against the second work piece  106 . The optional reverse threads also can rotate within the pre-bored hole  103 , thereby scraping the loose ends of material from that hole, which can provide a clean finished hole above the location where the head  120  comes to rest after being fully installed. 
     After the fastener  110  is fully installed, the optional reverse threads can provide additional holding power to prevent the work piece  102  from being removed from the second work piece  106  under force. For example, the added contact between the reverse threads and the material surrounding the pre-bored hole  103  can provide more friction between the fastener and the hole, which in turn can make much more force required to pull the work piece  102  away from work piece  106 . 
     Optionally, a first fastener  110  is installed on one side of a work piece  102 , such as a board, and a second fastener is installed directly across from the first fastener on an opposite side of the board, and in some cases in the same plane as the first fastener. Where these opposing fasteners optionally include the secondary threads, these threads can provide even more holding force to keep the work pieces fastened together. 
     II. Second Alternative Fastener Embodiment 
     A second alternative embodiment of the fastener is illustrated in  FIG. 19  and generally designated  210 . This embodiment is similar to the above embodiments in construction and operation with a few exceptions. For example, the end  250  of the screw  210  can generally include a last thread  246  that is included within the primary threads  240 . This last thread  246  can also include upper  241 A and lower  241 B thread surfaces, as can the remainder of the primary thread  240  as illustrated in  FIG. 19 . The last thread  246  can end at a leading portion  248 . This leading portion  248 , and more generally the last thread  246 , can transition or merge with the inclined surface  254 . This merging or transition can occur at the intersecting portion  247 . This intersecting portion can form a continuation or extension of the surface of the inclined surface  254 . The last thread  246  can also transition at the transition region  215  into the inclined surface  254 . As can be seen in  FIG. 19 , the leading portion  248  is adjacent the chisel edge  256 , but does not form a direct extension of that chisel edge  256 . The surface area of the inclined surface  256  thereby can be increased by the area corresponding to the intersecting portion  247 . 
     The operation of the second alternative embodiment in  FIG. 19  is similar to that of the embodiment in  FIGS. 12-18 . For example, the leading edge  248  and/or last thread  246  acts to scoop up material and transfer it to the surfaces of the threads so that that material can be augured up and out of a pre-bored hole created by the chisel edge  256 . Moreover, the chisel edge  256  and respective components can operate like a chisel break point as described in the embodiments herein. In some circumstances, however, the scooping action by the leading portion  248  can be slightly less than that of the embodiments described above due to the leading portion  248  not being disposed at the point of contact with the bottom of the pre-bored hole or the material, that is, directly adjacent the end forming an extension of the chisel edge  256 . Optionally, if desired, the leading portion  248  can be moved to the lower most extremity of either of the inclined surfaces  252 ,  254 . The chisel edge of this fastener surface can also include a chisel brake point as described above. 
     III. Third Alternative Fastener Embodiment 
     A third alternative embodiment of the screw is illustrated in  FIGS. 20 and 21  and generally designated  310 . This embodiment is similar to the above embodiments in construction and operation with a few exceptions. For example, the chisel edge  356  includes a small apex or point  357  at which the chisel edge sub portions  356 A and  356 B intersect. In this chisel edge construction, the chisel edge sub portions can be at an angle A relative to one another. This angle can generally be an obtuse angle, that is, greater than 90° and optionally less than 180°. In this embodiment, the inclined surfaces can be divided into sub portions  352   a  and  352   b , and  354   a  and  352   b , or additional sub portions if desired. These sub portions can include the negative rake angles or other angles of the inclined surfaces of the embodiments described above. The screw of this embodiment also can include a last thread  346  with a leading portion  348  that merges or transitions into one or more of the inclined surfaces, generally forming an extension of those surfaces, the chisel edge, or other components of the end of the screw. Further, the chisel edge of this fastener can include a chisel brake point and can operate like the embodiments described above. 
     IV. Installation Tools 
     As mentioned above, a tool can be used to start and advance the above mentioned fasteners, or other fasteners, into one or more work pieces to join those work pieces in the manners explained above. For example, a tool can be used to start a screw and subsequently advance the screw through the side of a board and subsequently into an underlying or adjacent joist or other structure. 
     A current embodiment of a tool suitable for such a fastener installation is illustrated in  FIGS. 22-24 , and generally designated  60 . As shown there, the tool  60  can include a frame  62  including a handle  61 , a guide  80  and an optional clamping assembly  77 . The frame  62  can include a bottom surface  69  that is adapted to engage a top surface  1011  of a work piece  102 . This work piece can be a board or any other type of structure described herein. The tool can be used to install a fastener  110  as described above through the first work piece  102  and into the second work piece  106 . 
     Generally in the embodiments shown, the work piece  102  can include a first surface, also referred to as a side surface  108  that lays in a first plane  1013 . Opposite the first surface or side surface  108 , on the opposite side of the work piece, can be an opposing side surface  115 , or fourth surface, that lays generally in a fourth plane  1016 . The work piece  102  also can include a third surface or top surface  1011  that generally lies at least partially within a third plane  1012 , and a second surface or bottom surface  109  that generally lies in a second plane  1014  that is parallel to and on the opposite side of the work piece from the top surface  1012 . The first surface  108  and fourth surface  115  can be generally perpendicular to the top  1011  and bottom  109  surfaces of the work piece  102 . 
     The guide  80  of the tool  60  can generally define an angled bore  88  that is positioned in a non-orthogonal angle, or generally angularly offset from 90°, relative to the side surface  108  of the first work piece  102  when the tool  60  readied for advancing the fastener. The angled bore can extend from a first opening  84  to a second opening  85 . The first opening can be configured to receive a fastener and generally operate as an entrance into which a fastener can be inserted into the tool  60 . The second opening  85  can serve as an exit through which the fastener exits the tool  60  as it advances into the work piece  102 . 
     The angled bore  88  in this embodiment, and in particular the guide  80 , can include first and second guide plates  81  and  82 . These guide plates  81  and  82  can be constructed from stamped parts forming opposing halves of the angled bore. The stamped parts can be metal, such as steel, stainless steel or other metals, or optionally composites or polymers. The stamped metal halves cooperate to form the angled bore  88 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 23 , the guide plates  81  and  82  can include opposing tabs  86  and  87  ( FIG. 23 ) that extend radially outwardly generally from the angled bore and/or the axis  400  of the angled bore. These tabs  86  and  87  can be positioned in the frame  62  so that they engage and contact one another. To join the tabs  86  and  87 , the tabs can be inserted in slots  64  defined by certain portions of the frame  62 . When placed in the slots, the guide plate tabs  86  and  87  can be held in close proximity to one another to generally secure the opposing halves  81  and  82  of the guide  80  together. Of course, where other constructions are desired, the guide plates  81  and  82  can be of a unitary construction such that the tabs  86  and  87  are eliminated. For example, in the embodiments described below, the angled bore  84  can simply be defined by a unitary structure screw guide. Alternatively, the plates  81  and  82  can be joined with fasteners projecting through or otherwise fastening the tabs  86  and  87 . 
     Optionally, a protective plate  92  can be included with the tool  60 . This protective plate  92  can be placed adjacent the first opening  84  to generally protect the uppermost edges of the guide plates  81 ,  81  from damage when the fastener  110  or a portion of a tool  101  is inserted in the angled bore  88 . For example, the protective plate  92  can define a plate bore  94 , which can be generally aligned with and/or centered on the axis  400  of the bore  88 . The inner edge of the protective plate  92  adjacent the plate bore  94  can extend over and at least partially or fully cover the edges  98  of the respective guide plates  81  and  82 . With the inner edge of the protective plate covering the edges of the guide plates, a fastener  110  or portion of the tool  101  can be guided or generally deflected so it does not engage those edges  98 . In turn, this can prevent chipping, marring, breaking or other damage to those edges  98  and more generally to the guide plates with the fastener or tool. Of course, if desired, the guide plates themselves can include integral protective plates extending therefrom, or the protective plate  92  and similar devices can be absent from the construction altogether. 
     The frame  62  and the other various components of the tool  60  can be constructed from stainless steel, steel, other metals, composites and/or polymers. For example, as mentioned above, the guide plates  81  and  82 , as well as the optional protective plate  92  can be constructed from steel, while the like components of the frame  62 , such as the handle  61 , the secondary handle  64  and the spacers  74  and  79  can be constructed from a polymeric material such as a high impact resistant plastic. 
     Referring to  FIGS. 22 and 23 , the guide  80  and/or frame  62  can include a spacer  74  that extends downwardly from the bottom  69  of the frame  62 . The spacer  74  includes opposing side surfaces  78 A and  78 B. The side surface  78 A can be configured to engage and rest immediately adjacent or up against the side surface  108  of the work piece  102 . The opposing side surface  78 B of the spacer  74  can be configured to be positioned adjacent another work piece  119  positioned near the first work piece  102 , as described below. 
     The spacer  74  can project downwardly or generally protrude into a space  105  that is immediately adjacent the side surface  108  of the work piece  102 . This space  105  can be defined by the dimension or width of the spacer  74  between the side surface  78 A and the second side surface  78 B. Of course, if other types of spacers or indexing elements are desired, they can be included and extend outwardly from the bottom surface  69  of the frame  62 . For example, the spacer  74  can be configured to fit in the space  105  that is immediately adjacent the side surface  108  of the work piece  102  as shown. The spacer can be of a dimension or width, for example about ⅛ to ½, 1/16 to 3/16, or about ¼ of an inch, to effectively set the preselected spacing or distance between a first work piece  102  and a third work piece  119  as shown in  FIG. 22 . Alternatively, the spacer can be dimensioned to precisely fit between already preinstalled work pieces or boards to further fasten those boards to underlying substructures or improve the fastening of the boards to other structures. 
     The side surface  78 A of the spacer  74  also defines the second opening  85  of the angled bore  84  through which a fastener is adapted to exit. Further, the guide plates  81  and  82  can extend downwardly to the opening  85  and terminate at or adjacent the side surface  78 A. The second opening  85  can be positioned a preselected distance away from the bottom surface of the frame  62  in certain applications. Although as shown the second opening  85  opens out the side surface  78 A of the spacer  74 , the angled bore alternatively can be constructed so that it opens out the bottom surface  69  of the frame  62  (not shown). 
     With the illustrated configuration of the guide  80  and the spacer  74 , the angled bore  84  extends through these elements and generally through the space  105  immediately adjacent the side surface  108  of the work piece  102 . The angled bore  88  can substantially encase or otherwise contain a fastener  110  all the way up to the side surface  108  of the work piece  102 . Optionally, the opening  85  can be placed within about 1/16 to about ⅛, further optionally about 1/16 to about ¼ of an inch from the side surface of the work piece  102 . Further optionally, the opening  85  can be configured so that at least a portion of it lays within a plane that is generally parallel to the plane  1013  in which the side surface  108  of the board lays. 
     Accordingly, when the fastener  110  is rotated, even when its end includes a chisel break point or other construction, that end is restrained and generally contained in the bore  88 , so that it does not wobble excessively, even when beginning to penetrate the side surface  108  at the angle as illustrated or described in the embodiments of the fastener above. This can provide a precise alignment of the fastener  110  into the side surface of the work piece  102  and into or through other surfaces of that work piece  102  and underlying work pieces  106 . 
     The fastener guide  80  can also be configured to include a material ejection port  83  that is in communication with the angled bore  88 . As shown in  FIG. 24 , the guide plate  81  can define a material ejection port  83 . The material ejection port  83  can be a hole that is located between the first opening  84  and the second opening  85 . The precise location of the material ejection port  83  and its dimension can be selected based on the material to be augured or otherwise ejected or evacuated out from the angled bore  88 . As illustrated, the material ejection port is positioned generally above the bottom surface  69  of the frame  62 , and can be about ½″ long. Of course, it can be of other dimensions, for example about ⅛ to about ¼ of an inch in length. Generally, it can be of a dimension that is sufficient to allow material augured by a fastener  110  to eject from the port  83 . 
     The material ejection port  83  can be dimensioned and located so that it is defined on the underside of the angled bore  88  so that the material drops out from the bore via gravity through the port. The material ejection port  83  can be large enough to drop out fibers or other material augured from the work pieces, yet small or short enough so that a screw inserted into the angled bore  88  from the first opening  84  will not have its end drop out from, or otherwise protrude, or get hung up in the ejection port  83  while the screw moves toward the second opening  85 . 
     The material ejection port  83  can include a lowermost rim  95  as shown in  FIGS. 23 and 24 . This lowermost rim can be positioned so that it is located above the top surface  1011  of the work piece  102 , and/or so that it is also located above the top surface  1111  of an adjacent work piece  119 . With such a positioning of the lowermost rim of the material ejection port, material augered up through the angled bore can be ejected out from the bore generally above the top surface  1011 , as well as the top surface  1111  if the work piece  119  is in place adjacent the work piece  102 . In turn, the ejected material can freely flow out from the port over or adjacent the lowermost rim  95 . It is noted that the lowermost rim may be considered to be above the top surface  1011  of a particular work piece merely because it is above the plane in which the surface is located. For example, the lowermost rim  95  in  FIG. 24  can be considered above the top surface  1011  even though it is not directly over that top surface  1011 . Optionally, in certain applications, the material ejection port can be eliminated from the tool. 
     The material ejection port also can be housed between opposing frame flanges  75  which extend from the rearward portion of the frame  62 . These flanges  75  can extend outward a sufficient distance to generally conceal the material ejection port  83 . If desired, the flanges can form and include a pivot axis  73 . The frame itself  62  can pivot about this pivot axis  73  in the direction of the arrow  75 A after a fastener has been sufficiently advanced and installed in a work piece  102  to fasten or join it with another work piece  106 . By pivoting the frame about the pivot axis  73  and in general having the frame rotate on the rearward portion of the flanges  75 , undue stress and forces on the spacer  74  can be reduced or eliminated. This can add to the longevity of the spacer, particularly where it is constructed from a polymer material. Of course, the flanges  75  can be eliminated altogether if desired. 
     With further reference to  FIG. 23 , the material ejection port can include edges  89  constructed to function as wipers to wipe or pull material  104  entrapped within the threads  140  of the fastener  110  out therefrom. The edges can be configured to extend generally along or parallel to the axis  400  of the angled bore. Of course, the edges alternatively can be offset at a predetermined angle relative to that axis  400  as desired. The edges can be somewhat sharpened or otherwise disposed at a right angle relative to the rotation of the fastener  110 . In this manner, any excessive material that protrudes from beyond the crests of the fastener threads can catch or otherwise engage the edges  89 . In so doing, the edges can dislodge the material  104  from the threads and cause it to further drop out with the assistance of gravity from the port  83 . Where the material  104  is taken from a work piece constructed from a composite or polymer or an extremely fibrous material, the wiper edges can act to wipe these materials from the fastener as it rotates the angled bore  88  to prevent or impair binding of the fastener  110 . 
     Generally, the wiper edges can be generally linear, but of course can be tapered or curved as desired. Further, the edges can be positioned somewhere around the circumference of the fastener  110  so that as the fastener rotates at least a portion of it passes by and is capable of engaging augered material associated with the fastener against the edges. In some circumstances, where the material is known not to be of a type that would excessively bind the rotation of the fastener  110 , the edges can be absent. For example, the material ejection port can extend all the way around the circumference of the angled bore  88 . 
     The material ejection port can serve to remove or eject bored material from the angled bore to reduce some or all of the amount of material pulled back into the pre-bored hole by the fastener, which in some cases can cause damage, such as splitting or bulging of the work piece in the area surrounding the fastener. For example, the material ejection port can enable material augered up from the work piece to be ejected away from the threads and shaft of the fastener. In cases where the material ejection port is absent, or otherwise does not facilitate ejection of the material from the bore, and the head of the fastener is dimensioned so that it is almost the same dimension as the angled bore, the head might capture and drag all the pre-bored material back into the hole as the head advances toward the hole. That material would be captured in the space between the shaft and threads, and the walls of the angled bore, with the head acting like a cap or piston to pull the augered material between it and the work piece back into the pre-bored hole. With the material ejection port, the material augered or removed from the hole is ejected from the bore so that there is minimal, if any, augered or removed material for the head to pull into the hole. In turn, this can reduce the likelihood of damage to the work piece around the area of the hole caused by the material entering the hole, possibly along with the components of the fastener. Of course, in certain applications where material might not readily be pulled into the hole by the fastener, the material ejection port can be eliminated. 
     As shown in  FIG. 24 , the guide  80  optionally can include a beveled portion  83 A adjacent the lower extremity of the port  83 . This beveled portion can generally increase the internal area of the bore adjacent the port  83 . The bore also can serve as a ramp to assist the material  104  being ejected out from the bore  88  through the port  83 . The angled bore  88  can have an internal dimension D 7 , which can be in the form of a diameter about 0.1 to about 0.4 inches, optionally about 0.15 to about 0.75 inches, or other dimensions greater or less as desired. In general, the diameter D 7  can be slightly larger than the dimension than the head D 5  of the fastener  110 . For example, the dimension of the diameter D 5  can be about 0.001 to about 0.05 inches less than the diameter D 7  of the angled bore  88 . Other tolerances can be suitable as well, depending on the application. The diameters D 5  and D 7  can be matched so that the head of the fastener does not excessively wobble or move other than rotationally and/or along the axis  400  of the angled bore  88 . This in turn can reduce, impair or otherwise prevent wobble of the fastener  110  as it is advanced into the work pieces. It also can prevent or impair the axis of rotation  200  of the fastener  110  from becoming misaligned or substantially non-parallel with the axis  400  of the angled bore  88 , which also can be considered the advancement axis of the fastener  110 . In certain circumstances where the axis  200  of the fastener  110  becomes significantly deviates or is at a substantial angle relative to the axis of advancement  400  of the angled bore  88 , it is possible that the portions of the fastener can bind against the material surrounding the second opening. In limited circumstances, this can impair advancement and/or rotation of the fastener and/or otherwise impair the functioning of the tool and its removal from the respective work piece. 
     The angled bore  88  as shown in  FIGS. 22 and 24  can be configured so that it is of a length that closely corresponds to the length of the fastener  110 . For example, the length of the angled bore  88  can be about 1.9 to about 2 inches in length, while the length of the screw is about 1.5 to about 1.9 inches in length. Of course, other lengths of the bore and fastener could be selected and still function suitably for other applications. With this particular embodiment, where the fastener is slightly shorter than the length of the angled bore  88 , the fastener  110  can be substantially encased within the angled bore  88  immediately before it is advanced into the work piece. In this manner, the features of the fastener can be restrained or otherwise contained within the bore to prevent excessive wobble. For example, the end of the fastener can be closely constrained as it begins to penetrate the side surface  108  of the work piece  102 . 
     Optionally, the angled bore can be about 0.01 to about 1.0 inches, further optionally about 0.25 inches longer than the fastener  110 . Accordingly as shown in  FIG. 24 , when the fastener is positioned in the angled bore  88  before it is advanced into the work piece, as shown in broken lines in  FIG. 24 , the head of the fastener  110  can be a preselected distance  72  inward from the portion of the frame  71  surrounding the angled bore  88  and in particular the opening  84 . Optionally, the angled bore  88  itself, in particular the guide plates  81  and  82  can include a slight frustoconical taper at or adjacent the first opening  84  extending outwardly to the surrounding portion  71  of the frame  62 . With the head of the fastener  110  slightly disposed inwardly slightly from the surrounding surface, a user can quickly center a drive, such as a Philips or star drive feature associated with a drill, in the head of the fastener. The region of the angled bore  88  above the head of the fastener  110  can act to capture and guide the drive feature into the head more easily. Alternatively, if desired, the fastener  110  and angled bore  88  can be more grossly mismatched in length. For example, the fastener  110  can be longer than the angled bore  88  so that it protrudes outward beyond the surrounding portion  71  of the frame  62  a preselected distance in certain applications. 
     With reference to  FIGS. 22-23 , the tool  60  can also include a clamp assembly  77 . This clamp assembly can include the first spacer  74  and a second spacer  79  spaced distal from the first spacer. The distance between the first and second spacers can be about the width or slightly larger than the width of the work piece into which the tool is designed to install fasteners. Further, this distance can be varied by operating the clamping assembly  77 . For example, the second spacer  79  can be spaced about 5″-6″ from the first spacer  74  and can be actuated to move closer to the first spacer  74  to close the distance between those elements to the precise dimension or width of the work piece  111  into which the fastener is to be driven. This can provide a clamping action to clamp the side surfaces  108  and  115  of the work piece  102  between these features of the tool. In turn, this can temporarily rigidly hold the guide  80  and/or spacer  74  in a fixed orientation relative to the board  102  and more particularly hold the axis  400  of the bore  88  in a desired alignment with the side surface  108  of the work piece  102 . In turn, the fastener can be rotated and advanced precisely into a desired location through the side surface  108  and into and through the first work piece and/or second work piece. More generally, the clamp assembly  77  can hold the tool  60  in a desired orientation and aim the fastener  110  precisely into and/or through the work pieces. 
     Optionally, the clamp assembly  77 , or more generally the tool when no clamp assembly is included, positions the first spacer side surface  87 A immediately adjacent the side surface  108  of the work piece. The second opening  85  can also be placed immediately adjacent the side surface  108  of the work piece. In such a configuration, there may be little or no gap or void between the side surface and these elements. Accordingly, when a screw, for example, an embodiments of the fasteners described herein, is rotated in the angled bore, it is rotationally constrained right up to the side surface into which it is to advance. Where the end of the screw is configured to pre-bore a hole, this rotational constraint can offset the tendency of the screw end to wander or wobble when it is rotated against the work piece, and in turn assist in starting the screw in the work piece. 
     The clamp assembly further includes an arm  68 , a secondary handle  64  and a biasing element  66 , as shown in  FIGS. 22 and 23 . These elements can all be joined with a common element  63 . The common element  63  can be rotatably mounted on a pivot axle  65 . The arm  68  can extend downwardly through a portion of the frame  62  and be connected with the spacer  79 . The secondary handle  64  can extend at another location outward from the common element  63  and can be disposed generally adjacent the handle  61 . The secondary handle  64  can be moveable relative to the handle  61  and generally relative to the frame  62 . The secondary handle  64  can be considered movably joined with a frame  62  and adapted to actuate the clamp assembly and move the second spacer  79  to effectuate a clamping action on the work piece  102 . 
     Optionally, the secondary handle  64  can be spaced a preselected distance from the handle  61  so that a user can manually grasp simultaneously both the handle and the secondary handle and squeeze those elements so that they move closer to one another. In so doing, the secondary handle  64  rotates the common element  63  about the pivot axis, which in turn rotates the arm  68  and correspondingly the second spacer  79  toward the first spacer  74  to provide a clamping action on the work piece  102 . 
     The secondary handle  64 , as well as the arm  68  and spacer  79  can be biased toward the configuration shown in broken lines in  FIG. 22  by the biasing element  66 . This biasing element can be in the form of a biasing arm  66  that, when installed in the frame, can engage the interior surface  67  of the frame  62  and accordingly urge the common element  63  in the direction of the arrow  63 A shown in  FIG. 22 . In turn, this can urge the secondary handle  64  and the arm  68  to the configuration shown in broken lines in  FIG. 22  as well. 
     To overcome this biasing action, a user can manually grasp a secondary handle  64  and pull it toward the handle  61 , which will cause a clamping action on the side surfaces  108  and  115  of the work piece  102 , thereby holding the angled bore  88  and generally the axis  400  of the bore in a desired orientation relative to the side surface  108  of the work piece  102 . 
     Other biasing elements can be used to provide the clamping action of the tool  60  on the work piece  102 . For example, instead of the biasing element  66  being preformed and engaged against the interior of the frame, a coil spring or leaf spring could be positioned adjacent the common element  63  to urge the arm  68  and second spacer  79  in a desired direction about the pivot  65 . Optionally, the pivot could have a coil spring built between it and the common element to provide a biasing force. Further optionally, the biasing element  66  could urge the arm and the spacer in a direction about the pivot axis  65  in the direction opposite that shown by the arrow  63 A in  FIG. 22 . In such a construction, the user would then move the secondary handle  64  away from the handle  61  to open up the distance between the first spacer  74  and the second spacer  79 . With such an alternative configuration, upon installing the respective spacer on the opposing side surfaces of the work piece  102 , the user could release the handle so that the biasing element urges the respective spacers to move relative to one another and provide a clamping action on the work piece  102 . 
     With reference to  FIG. 23 , the second spacer  79  can define a recess or hole  76  therein. This recess can extend all the way through, or only partially through, the second spacer  79 . This recess  76  can be configured to straddle or otherwise extend around a hole in which another fastener  110  is positioned. This can be helpful in cases where the area surrounding the hole  103  is slightly raised due to the boring of the hole  103  by the fastener, or where the fastener is not of the type that pre-bores a hole, or where the fastener excessively bulges out material in the area surrounding the fastener  110 . The recess  76  generally surrounds the area so that the bulge in the material does not affect the dimension of the space  117  between the adjacent side surfaces of the respective work pieces  102  and  118 . Accordingly, the spacer  79 , even when overlapping bulged out material surrounding previously installed fasteners can be consistently spaced to provide a clean, even appearance in the spacing between the adjacent work pieces. Although shown in a generally U-shape, the recess or hole  76  can be of square, rectangular, triangular, or some other geometric shape sufficient to surround a fastener hole or fastener head on an adjacent work piece. Further, the recess  76  can extend farther up the arm  68  depending on the application. 
     Referring to  FIGS. 22-24 , a method for installing a fastener with the tool  60  to join work pieces will be briefly described. To begin, a first work piece  102  is provided where the first work piece includes a top surface  111  and opposing bottom surface  109 , a first side surface  108  and an opposing side surface  115 . The bottom surface  109  of the work piece is placed adjacent the upper surface  107  of the second work piece  106 . As illustrated, the second work piece  106  can be, for example, a underlying joist or subfloor. The first work piece  102  can be a deck board or other board constructed from any suitable board material as described above. 
     If a previous work piece  118  is already fastened to the underlying work piece  106 , the spacer tool  60  can be placed atop the work piece  102  with the bottom surface  69  resting adjacent that the upper surface  1011  of that work piece  102 . The spacer  79  can establish a preselected spacing that is the equivalent of the dimension or width of the second spacer  79  between the work piece  118  and work piece  102  and in particular the side surfaces of those work pieces that are adjacent one another. 
     The tool can be positioned so that the first spacer  74 , and in particular the first side surface  78 A of the first spacer  74  is positioned adjacent the side surface  108  of the work piece  102 . In so doing, the second opening  85  also is positioned adjacent that side surface  108 , with the angled bore  88  and related advancement axis  400  aligned at a predetermined non-orthogonal angle relative to the side surface  108  and the plane in which the side surface  108  lays. The second opening  85  is located so that it is immediately adjacent the first side surface  108  of the work piece  102 . To further secure and hold the angled bore  88  and opening  85  in these respective locations, a user can manually grasp the secondary handle  64 . In so doing, the handle actuates the common element  63  rotating it about the pivot axis  65 . This rotates the arm  68  and accordingly moves the second spacer  79  toward the first spacer  74 . In turn, this can provide a clamping action to clamp the first work piece  102  between the first spacer  74  and the second spacer  79 . As an example, the first spacer  74  can engage the first side surface  108 , and the second spacer  79  can engage the other side surface  115 . 
     A fastener  110  can be installed in the angled bore  88 . Assuming the fastener is an equal or lesser length than the angled bore, the fastener can bottom out and engage the side surface  108  of the work piece  102 . A small distance  72  as shown in  FIG. 24  will be left above the head of the screw. A user can then advance a driving tool  101  toward the frame. Due to the recessed configuration of the fastener head in the angled bore  88 , the tool can center within the angled bore  88  and come to rest in the drive feature of the fastener  110 . 
     While holding the tool  60  in a clamped configuration, with the axis  400  along a desired line of advancement into the work piece  102 , a user can actuate the drive tool  101  to rotate the fastener  110  as described with the fastener embodiments described above, or some other fastener as desired. The fastener  40  can be advanced along the axis  400  within the angle bore  88  so the fastener enters the first side surface  108  of the work piece  102  immediately after exiting the second opening  85  of the angled bore. The fastener then travels partially out the bottom surface  109  of the work piece  102 . Thereafter the fastener continues to rotate and penetrates the upper surface  107  of the second work piece  106  and continues to advance until the head of the fastener is at a desired location, which can be within a pre-bored hole created by the fastener, or generally so that the head of the fastener is at least partially concealed from view from above and generally does not obstruct the positioning of another work piece adjacent the first work piece  102 . 
     Where the fastener of the embodiments described above is used, as the fastener is advanced into the work piece  102 , it pre-bores a hole, and the material  104  from that hole is augured or otherwise fed up the threads. The material is ejected or evacuated generally from the angled bore  88  through the material ejection port  83 . This action is shown in  FIGS. 23 and 24 . Where the material ejection port  83  includes an edge  85  adjacent the material ejection port  83 , that edge can scrape augured material off from the threads or the remainder of the fastener  110 , and assist in evacuating that scraped material from the angled bore  88 . 
     After the first work piece  102  is installed and joined with the second work piece  106  with the fastener  110 , a third work piece  119  ( FIG. 22 ) can be installed adjacent the first work piece  102 , atop the second work piece  106 . The tool can be moved to a position atop the third work piece  119  in a manner such as that used in connection with the first work piece  102 . The first  74  or second  79  spacer, depending on the orientation of the tool  60 , can establish the desired spacing between the first work piece  102  and the third work piece  119 . A new fastener can be inserted in the angled bore as with the previous fastener described above. That new fastener can be advanced along the advancement axis  400  in a manner described above to install the new fastener in the third work piece  119  and second work piece  106  to join those work pieces together. The above process can be repeated at worksite to install multiple work pieces and join them with other work pieces. 
     The tool above and any of the other alternative embodiments of the tool herein, can be used to install multiple deck boards on underlying substructure subfloor or joists. The work pieces can be boards, which as used herein can include deck boards, porch boards or other boards constructed from wood, particle board, composites, polymers, plastics, metal or other materials as desired. In installing the fasteners and work pieces to join them together, the tool can provide a way to quickly and precisely align the fasteners with the respective side surfaces of the work pieces or boards and install them in a manner such that they are generally concealed from view when viewed from a viewer directly above. Further, the angled bore of the tool, and in particular the guide surrounding the angled bore extending upwardly above the upper surface of an adjacent work piece, can effectively prevent the threads of an advancing fastener from gouging, damaging or marring an immediately adjacent work piece as that advancing fastener is advanced into an adjacent work piece. 
     V. First Alternative Tool and Method Embodiment 
     A first alternative embodiment of the installation tool is shown in  FIGS. 25 and 26  and generally designated  160 . This embodiment of the tool is similar to the first tool embodiment described above with several exceptions. For example, the tool  160  generally includes a handle  161 , a fastener guide  180 , also referred to as a pilot element, and a spacer plate  174 . The screw guide  80  can be installed in a frame  162  constructed from a polymeric or other material, which can generally be of a solid or hollow construction like that described in the embodiment above. The guide  180  can include an angled bore which includes first and second angled bore portions  188 A and  188 B. The first portion  188 A can be defined by the primary guide element  172  and the second portion  1888  can be defined by the spacer plate  174 , which also can be referred to as a spacer. The primary guide element  172  can be configured at an angle relative to the spacer  174 , however, the angled bore portions  188 A and  188 B can be aligned with and parallel to one another along the axis  400  of the angled bore. As with the embodiment above, this axis  400  can be configured and oriented at a fixed predetermined angle relative the side of the work piece  102  into which it advances a fastener  110 . As with the above embodiment, a fastener  110  can be disposed within and generally circumferentiated by the primary  188 A and secondary  188 B portions of the angled bore  188 . The primary and secondary portions can be dimensioned to be the same, and slightly larger than the outermost dimensions of the head and/or threads of the screw  110 , so that as with the embodiment above, the screw can be constrained yet still rotate and advance along the axis  400  when driven and rotated by a powered or manual tool. 
     The primary and secondary portions  188 A and  188 B of the angled bore can be separated from one another by a gap  183  formed therebetween. This gap can also be referred to as a material ejection port and can operate similar to the material ejection port described in the embodiments herein. For example, material  104  that is scraped or pre-bored from a work piece  102  and augered up the angled bore can be ejected or extracted out the port  183  to prevent or impair binding of the fastener as it advances or rotates. 
     Although the material ejection port  183  is shown as being formed by separate elements, for example being formed between the spacer  174  and the primary guide portion  172 , the gap can be replaced with an alternative structure. For example, the guide  180  and in particular the angled bore can extend all the way to the location adjacent the surface of the side surface  108  of the work piece  102 . In this alternative construction, the guide  180  can include a transversely drilled hole or a milled gap at least partially therethrough to allow the removed material  104  to escape from the angled bore  188  as shown in  FIG. 26 . Optionally, the end of the guide  180  adjacent the work piece  102  can be at an angle that corresponds to the surface of the work piece. Alternatively, the end of the guide element can terminate at a plane that is orthogonal to the axis  400 . 
     As shown in  FIGS. 25 and 26 , the spacer  174  can be in the form of a plate that is rigidly attached to the frame  162  with screws or other fasteners so that it does not move laterally or vertically relative to the remainder of the guide element  180  and/or the work piece as the fastener  110  is advanced through the tool  160 . Accordingly, the features of the tool steadily aims the fastener toward a desired location on the side of the work piece  102 , and constrains it, regardless of wobbling forces that are generated by the fastener engaging the work piece  102 , as with the embodiments herein. 
     As illustrated in  FIG. 25 , the tool  160  also can include a second spacer  179 . This spacer  179  can be mounted to an arm  177  that is further joined with a frame  162 . The spacer can establish a gap between adjacent work pieces, much like that of the spacer in the first tool embodiment described above. The arm  177  and spacer  179  can project through a slot  178  that is defined in a portion of a frame  162 . The spacer  179  can extend beyond the bottom surface  169  of the tool into a corresponding space between adjacent work pieces. The spacer  179  optionally can be adjustable, moving within the slot  178  to accommodate work pieces of different widths. For example, the spacer  179  can move toward or away from the first spacer  174  on the opposite end of the tool  160 . With this construction, the spacer  179  can set a gap between the first work piece  102  being fastened down by the tool and a second work piece immediately adjacent that work piece. Optionally, the arm can be tensioned or under force so that it is urged against the opposing side surface of the work piece  102 . In such a manner, it can act like a clamp to generally clamp the work piece between the first spacer  174  and the second spacer  179 . The clamping action, however, can be somewhat less than that of the other tool embodiments described herein. 
     VI. Second Alternative Tool and Method Embodiment 
     A second alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool and related method is illustrated in  FIGS. 27-30  and generally designated  460 . The installation tool shown there is similar in construction and operation to the embodiments described above with several exceptions. 
     As shown in  FIG. 27 , the fastener installation tool  460  includes a handle  461  joined with a frame  462 . The frame is joined with a first fastener guide  480  and a second fastener guide  580 . A secondary handle  464  is operably joined to the frame  462  and a biasing element  466 , as well as the first fastener guide  480 . The secondary handle and biasing element  466  are adapted to move the first fastener guide  480  as described below. 
     Turning to  FIGS. 27 and 31 , the guides  480  and  580  are generally identical except reversed at opposite ends of the frame  462 . Because the first and second guides are identical but simply reversed at opposite ends of the frame, only the first guide will be described here. The guide  480  is a monolithic structure that defines an angled bore  488  and further includes a or otherwise is joined with a spacer  474  that extends downwardly from the lower portion of the guide. The guide  480  can include a material ejection port  483  that is located between the first  484  and second  485  openings of the angled bore  488 . The material ejection port can also include a lowermost rim  495  as described in the embodiments herein. Further, like the embodiments above, the angled bore can be aligned along an axis  400  along which the fastener  110  can be advanced in a manner similar to the above embodiments. The guide  480  can include a beveled region  482  ( FIG. 31 ) adjacent the first opening  484  to guide the fastener  110  into the angled bore  488 . Likewise, the angled bore  488  can be of a length that is less than the length of the fastener  110  as described above so that before being installed into a work piece, the top of the head is slightly recessed inward from the outer portion of the guide element to facilitate guiding of a drive feature of a tool into the head of the fastener  110 . 
     The guide  480  also can include or be joined with a spacer  474  that can be monolithic with a remainder of the guide. The angled bore  488  can extend downwardly through the spacer  474  so that the spacer  474  defines at least a portion of the angled bore  488 . The angled bore  488  can terminate at the second opening  485  which can be defined by the side surface  478 A of the spacer  474 . As with the above embodiments, when the tool is used to install a fastener, this opening and thus the fastener can be positioned immediately adjacent the side surface  108  of the respective work piece  102 . Optionally, as shown in  FIGS. 30 and 33 , and described further below, the monolithic structure of either of the guides  480  and  580  including the spacer, bore, and material ejection port, can be removed and separated from the frame  462  as a unit for replacement or service. 
     The guide  480  can define additional apertures  489  ( FIG. 30 ) through which pins  465 B can fit to prevent excessive rotational movement of the guide  480  relative to the frame. These pins  465  can also be slidably disposed in a slots  422 ,  423  so that the pins can generally guide the guide  480  linearly in the direction of arrow  558 . 
     The guide  480  can operatively be engaged against a portion of the secondary handle  464  at the handle portion  467 . The handle  464  can be rotatable about the pivot axis  465 . The movement of the handle  464 , however can be constrained by the connection bracket  425 , which can engage the secondary handle  464 , and under the force of the biasing element  466 , urge the handle in the direction  555  as shown in  FIG. 28 . The connection bracket  425  can be joined via a pin  466 A with the biasing element  466 . 
     The biasing element  466  can be in the form of a coil spring which is joined to the frame  462  in a relatively fixed location via a pin  466 B at one end and is moveable with the pin  466 A in the slot  427  at the opposite end thereof. Although shown as a coil spring, the biasing element  466  can be replaced with a variety of different biasing elements, for example leaf springs, elastomeric materials, pneumatic cylinders, hydraulic cylinders, solenoids, or other elements that can move the first guide  480  and/or second guide  580  relative to one another and/or the frame  462  to clamp or otherwise engage opposing surfaces of a work piece into which a fastener is to be installed within the tool  60 . 
     Returning to  FIGS. 27 and 30 , the handle  461  can be joined with the frame  462  via a handle frame  420 . This handle frame  420  can include an arm that extends upwardly into the handle  461 . The handle frame  420  can also include slots  422  which can align with the slots  423  in the frame through which the pins  465 B can project. The handle frame  422  can be fastened to the frame via fasteners such as rivets as illustrated. Of course other fasteners can be used, or the handle and handle frame can be monolithically formed with the remainder of the frame. 
     The frame  462  can include feet or tabs  269 A and  269 B which extend outward from the lateral sides of the frame a distance sufficient so that the width of the frame to the outer most portion of the feet on opposing sides is about 1.5 inches, which corresponds to the width of a common board used as a joist or underlying substructure. Of course, the feet can extend outward from the sides of the frame other distances, or may be alternatively folded inward depending on the particular application. Indeed, even if desired, the feet may be separate elements such as plates that are joined to the bottom of the frame and can extend outward a preselected distance from the frame depending on the desired application. 
     As shown in  FIGS. 27 and 29 , the pins  465 B are located through apertures  489  in the screw guide  480 . Pins  465  are also linearly guided via their registration within the slots  422 ,  423  defined by the handle frame and frame. In operation, the forward portion  467  of the secondary handle  464  can engage the pins  465 B or the guide  480  itself and push the pins forward in the slot  422 ,  423 . Accordingly, the guide  480 , joined with the pins  465 B moves forward in direction  558 . This movement of the guide  480  is generally along the linear axis  428 . Optionally, to impair rotation of the guide  480  as it moves along in the direction  558 , the guide can also be guided directly or indirectly along the second axis  429 , by the pin  466 A sliding in the slot  427 , with the connection bracket  425  rigidly joined with the guide  480  so that the guide  480  does not rotate relative to the frame while moving in the direction  558 . A variety of different slots and guide configurations can be substituted for those shown to ensure the guide  480  moves linearly in direction  558  rather than rotates. Of course, if a pivoting action or rotation of the guide  480  is desired for a certain application, those guides and slots could be modified to include curvilinear portions or otherwise facilitate rotation of the guide as desired. 
     Operation of the installation tool  460  on a work piece  102  will now be described with reference to  FIGS. 27 and 28 . As shown in  FIG. 27 , the installation tool is initially in a retracted mode shown in solid, but reconfigured to an extended mode shown in phantom, to fit the work piece  102 . In the retracted mode, the biasing element  466  has urged the guide element  480  inward toward the other guide element  580  so that the dimension between the spacer  474  and spacer  574  are dimension  570 . To increase that dimension so the spacers  474  and  575  can fit on opposing sides  108  and  115  of the work piece  102 , a user manually grasps the secondary handle  464  and draws it in the direction  554 . The user can do this simply by squeezing the secondary handle  464  and handle  461  together. 
     The movement of the secondary handle  464  rotates it about the pivot  465  in the direction of the arrow  465   a  as shown in  FIG. 27 . In turn, this engages a portion  467  of the secondary handle  464  against the pins  465 B which causes the pins to slide in the slots  422 ,  423 . This moves the guide  480 , which is joined with the pins  465 B in the direction  558  outward from the frame  462 . This also moves the first spacer  474  away from the second spacer  479 . When the dimension  570  is increased so that the spacers  474  and  574  can be positioned and slide downward along the sides  108  and  115  of the work piece, the user may do so. In so doing, the lower surface, and in particular the feet  469 A and  469 B are engaged against the upper surface of the work piece  102 . After the feet are engaged against the upper surface and the spacers  474  and  574  have been disposed in the spaces  105  and  117  immediately adjacent the respective sides  108  and  115 , the user can release the secondary handle  464 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 28  this release is shown generally as movement of the handle  464  in direction  555 . When this occurs, the biasing element  466  exerts a force  551  on the pins  466 A. This pulls the connection bracket  425  so that the pin  466 A slides in the slot  427 , thereby allowing the connection bracket  425  to pull the guide  480  in the direction  559 . This provides a clamping effect between the spacers  474  and  574 , which in turn causes the tool to clampingly engage the work piece  102 . With the work piece clamped between the spacers, the angled bores  488  and  588  of the guides  480  and  580  are aligned along the respective advancement axes, and the side surfaces of the respective spacers are positioned against the respective sides of the work piece. Accordingly, the fasteners can be rotated and advanced in the respective angled bores of the respective guides and installed in a manner similar to that described in the embodiments herein. After the fasteners are sufficiently installed, the secondary handle  464  can again be engaged to move the spacer  474  away from the spacer  574  to release the clamp on the work piece. The tool  460  can then be removed from the work piece. After the tool is removed, another work piece can be installed adjacent the work piece  102  and the process can be repeated with the tool to install additional features. 
     The above clamping mechanism of the tool  460  utilizing the guide  480 , the secondary handle  464  and related mechanisms, can provide fine adjustment of the tool to accommodate boards generally of the same nominal dimensions but which may have variations due to quality of inconsistency of those boards. For example, the adjustment with the handle  464  can generally adjust the guide  480  and spacers so that the tool accommodates certain boards, for example 5¾″ wide boards that may have variation of an ⅛″ to ¼″. In applications where a user may want to switch to a different job and install a larger board, for example a 6″ composite board, the tool optionally can include a more coarse adjustment mechanism  590 , which allows the tool to be used with different width or dimensioned boards. 
     Referring to  FIGS. 29-33 , one suitable coarse adjustment mechanism  590  can include a stopper assembly including first and second stopper pins  592 A and  592 B. The stopper pins can extend through the respective slots  595  defined by the frame  462 . One or both of the pins can be threaded. As shown in  FIG. 32 , the upper stopper pin  592 A is threaded and can receive a wing nut  593  to secure the stopper assembly to the frame in a fixed position. The frame itself may define recesses  594  which can accommodate the dimensions of the wing nut  593  or whatever other fastener may be used. 
     The stopper assembly  590  can be prone to rotation due to forces exerted by a work piece on the tool during installation or a clamping action executed by the tool. For example, as shown in  FIG. 33 , the work piece  102  can exert a force  530  on the spacer  574  which can urge the spacer to rotate in the direction of the arrow  532  when the tool clamps the work piece  102 . If the guide  580  is allowed to rotate significantly, it can misalign the spacer  574  with the side surface  115  of the work piece  102 , which in turn can misalign the fastener  110  with the side surface  115  of the work piece. Accordingly, as the fastener  110  is advanced, it can damage the work piece  102  or otherwise bind in the angled bore of the screw guide  580 . To counter this possible rotation in the direction of the arrow  532 , or other rotation, the stopper assembly can include tabbed detents  597 A that interfit within corresponding detents  597 B. The angle of the upper detents  597 A can be such that the free tabs engage the inner surfaces of the apertures  597 B and prevent the stopper from rotating. Likewise, the lower tabs  598 A can be angled inward and can be adapted so that the ends  599 C of the tabs engage the flat surfaces of the apertures  599 D to prevent rotation of the stopper assembly and subsequently to prevent rotation of the guide  580 . There are a variety of other constructions that can prevent such rotation. Such constructions may be readily exchanged with the adjustment element  590  described herein. 
     As further illustrated with reference to  FIGS. 30 and 32 , the coarse adjustment mechanism  590  can be removed to remove and/or replace the guide  580 . For example, a worn out guide  508  can be replaced with a new guide. Alternatively, a guide having a spacer with a first dimension, for example 3/16″, can be replaced with a guide having a spacer of another dimension, for example 1/16″ to provide different spacing between adjacent boards. In some cases, the smaller spacers, for example those of ¼″, 3/16″ or smaller can work well to limit the size of the gap established by the tool between adjacent boards, as described in more detail below. In turn, with the small gap between the boards, even where the boards are shrinkable boards and after such boards shrink, the resulting gap is still suitable. 
     Referring further to  FIGS. 30 and 32 , to effect the removal of the guide  580  and replace or interchange it with another guide, the nut  593  can be threaded off or generally removed from the stopper pin  592 A. With the nut removed, the first and second stopper pins  592 A and  592 B can be removed from the respective slots  595  and stopper pin holes  596 A and  596 B, generally pulled out in the direction as shown in  FIG. 30 . From there, the guide  580  can also be removed from the frame of the tool  460  as shown. The guide can be serviced or replaced with another guide as desired. The guide  580  or some other replacement guide can be inserted in the frame  462  as shown, and the stopper pins can be reinserted into the respective stopper pin holes and slots. The nut or other fastening element can be reattached to the stopper mechanism to secure the guide  580  to the frame. 
     Although sometimes referred to as boards, the work pieces with which the fasteners and tools herein can be utilized can vary, for example, the work pieces can be composite materials, natural wood, polymeric sheets, particle board or other suitable building materials. 
     VII. Third Alternative Tool and Method Embodiment 
     A third alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool is illustrated in  FIGS. 34-41  and generally designated  660 . The installation tool shown there is similar in construction and operation to the embodiments described herein with several exceptions. For example, as shown in  FIGS. 34 and 34A , the fastener installation tool  660  includes a handle  661  that is joined with a frame  662 . The frame  662  is further joined with fastener guides  680 . These components can be joined via fasteners or welds, or the components can be of a monolithic, integral, single piece unit. The handle  661  can be of any of the constructions of the embodiments herein, or can be of a generally flattened and ergonomically acceptable shape. Further, although shown as including two fastener guides  680 , the frame  462  can include multiple fastener guides or can include a single guide, depending on the application and the space within which the tool is used. 
     Referring to  FIGS. 34, 34A and 35 , the fastener guides  680  are substantially identical and accordingly only one side will be described here. The guide of this embodiment is suited to advance fasteners, of the types discussed in the embodiments herein, or other conventional fasteners, into work pieces that are of a particular configuration. For example, as show in  FIGS. 34-37 , the work pieces are formed as what is conventionally shown as “porch boards,” or more generally boards that include a tongue-and-groove construction, where the tongue of one board is adapted to insert and be received by the corresponding groove defined by a side of an adjacent, similar board to enhance continuity between the boards and their connection to one another and/or an underlying substrate. 
     Referring to  FIGS. 35 and 40 , the work piece  602 , also referred to here as a board, is joined with a substrate  606  using the fastener installation tool  660  and respective fasteners, for example,  10 ,  110 ,  210  and/or  310 , or other fasteners as desired. The board  602  includes a side surface  608  that extends downwardly away from an upper surface  611  of the board. The side surface  608  joins the upper surface  611  at an upper corner. On the lower side of the board, the side surface  608  joins a lower surface of the board  607  at a second corner. 
     The side surface  608  includes a tongue  601  that projects outwardly from the side surface  608 . The tongue  601  includes a tongue upper surface  604 , a tongue side or end surface  605  and a tongue lower surface  609 . The tongue upper surface  604  intersects the board side surface  608  at a corner  603 . Although shown as generally planar and separate surfaces, the tongue upper surface  604 , tongue side surface  605 , and tongue lower surface  609  can alternatively form a multi-curved structure or can be of a generally continuous curved structure. For example, the multiple surfaces can be merged into a semi-circular or rounded structure, or a structure having multiple compound curvatures. As another option, the tongue  601  can be in the form of a triangle, rectangle, square, or other polygonal or curved geometric shape as desired. 
     With further reference to  FIGS. 35 and 40 , side surface  608  of the board and the upper surface of the tongue  604  meet at the corner  603 , and at that corner generally form some angle the angle 1-1, which can be of a variety of ranges, again depending on the geometric structure of the side surface and/or the tongue. For example, the angle 1-1 can be optionally a 90° angle so the side surface  608  and tongue upper surface  604  are perpendicular to one another. In other cases, due to the specific formation of the board or manufacturing tolerances, the side surface  608  and the tongue upper surface  604  can be at angles 1-1 ranging optionally from about 70° to about 120°, further optionally 80° to 110°, even further optionally 85° to 95°, or other angles therebetween. The side surface  608  and the lower tongue surface  609  can form similar angles, and can be joined at a corner formed similarly to corner  603  between the side surface  608  and the tongue upper surface  604 . 
       FIG. 40  also illustrates the interaction of the tongue  601  of one piece  602  with a groove  613 ′ of another piece  602 ′. The groove  613 ′, which can be identical to the groove  613 , can be formed in a side surface of work piece  602 ′. The groove  613 ′ can have a geometric shape corresponding to that of the tongue  601  which is described above. If desired, all of the surfaces of the tongue  601  can be mirrored to corresponding surfaces of the groove  613 ′. 
     Returning to  FIGS. 34-39 , the installation tool  660  is useful for installing fasteners in boards such as those described herein. The tool can include a guide  680 , which defines a bore  688  that extends along a bore axis  600 . The bore extends generally from a first bore opening  684  to a second bore opening  685  along the axis  600 . The angled bore  688  can be positioned in a non-orthogonal angle, or generally angularly offset from 90°, relative to the side surface  608  of the first work piece  602  when the tool  660  is readied for advancing the fastener, which, for exemplary purposes is fastener  110  from the embodiments above, but of course could be any screw embodiment herein, or other screws as desired. 
     The first opening  684  can be configured to receive the fastener  110  and generally operate as an entrance into which a fastener  110  can be inserted into the tool  660 . The second opening  685  can serve as an exit through which the fastener exits the tool  660  as it advances into the work piece  602 . Like the other embodiments herein, the bore can include a material ejection port  683  which is positioned and functions similar to the embodiments noted herein, so those descriptions of the other embodiments apply equally here. 
     The guide  680  can include an engagement head  696  which includes some features that are not described in other embodiments. For example, to accommodate the tongue-and-groove configuration of the work piece or board  602  and orient the bore  688  in a preselected configuration relative to the board, the engagement head  696  can include certain structural features. One such feature is the primary engagement surface  691 , which is adapted to abut or generally engage the side surface  608  of the work piece  602  as shown in  FIGS. 36 and 34A , generally above the tongue  601 . Another is the second opening  685 , which is defined at a corner or intersection  697  of the primary engagement surface  691  and a secondary engagement surface  692 . The longitudinal axis  600  of the bore  688  can generally be centered so that it projects through the corner or intersection  697  of the primary engagement surface  691  and secondary engagement surface  692 , and/or or adjacent to it, optionally offset 0.01 mm to 10 mm depending on the board structure. 
     Generally, the intersection  697  of the primary engagement surface  691  and secondary engagement surface  692  is configured to fit precisely adjacent or adjacent and/or in the corner  603  formed between the side surface  608  of the work piece and the tongue upper surface  604 . With this type of arrangement, the engagement head  696  and therefore the guide  680  can be precisely positioned with the bore  688 , and generally the longitudinal axis  600  of the bore, precisely aligned with the corner  603 , or some other location on the side surface  608 . In this manner, the fastener  110  can be started and advanced through the work piece in that region without splitting, cracking or bulging the tongue  601 . Although shown as the intersection of two generally planar surfaces at a corner or point, the corner  697  can be rounded or chamfered at the intersection of the respective primary engagement surface  691  and secondary engagement surface  692  if desired. 
     Optionally, the bore  688  can be offset from this intersection or corner  697  even farther, and defined substantially only in one of the primary engagement surface  691 , as shown in  FIG. 41 . There, the bore  688 ′ can be oriented so that when the guide  680 , and in particular the engagement head  696  is placed adjacent the work piece  602 , the bore  688 ′ and longitudinal axis  600 ′ are aligned with and aimed at the side surface  608  or and/or upper surface  611 . In such a construction, the guide  680  is configured so that the primary engagement surface  691  defines substantially all of the first opening  685 ′. Optionally with this construction, the second opening  685 ′ is defined only in the primary engagement surface  691  and is not defined in the secondary engagement surface  692 . Accordingly, the bore does not intersect or overlap the corner  697  defined between the respective primary engagement surface  691  and secondary engagement surface  692 . With this bore configuration, the bore is aimed at primarily only the side surface or upper surface of the board, so that the fastener, when advanced in the bore, will only penetrate these surfaces. Optionally, in such an alternative bore configuration, the fastener will not advance through the tongue  601 , or any surfaces thereof. 
     Returning to  FIGS. 36 and 34A  illustrating the guide defining the bore  688 , the second opening  685  is defined by the corner or intersection  697  of the primary engagement surface  691  and secondary engagement surface  692 . Because it overlaps both the primary engagement surface  691  and the secondary engagement surface  692 , the bore  688  at the second opening  685  is generally truncated by the intersecting planes of the respective primary and secondary engagement surfaces. Accordingly, each of the respective primary and secondary engagement surfaces  691  and  692  define at least a portion of the second opening  685 . With this bore configuration, the bore is aimed generally at the side surface  608  as well as a portion of the tongue  601 , for example, the tongue upper surface  604 , so that when advanced in the bore  688  and into the board, the fastener  110  can engage and penetrate two or more of these multiple surfaces. 
     Optionally, although shown as being generally equally divided between the primary and secondary engagement surfaces  691  and  692 , the second opening  685  can be defined by different proportions of those respective surfaces. And again, as noted in the optional embodiment above, the second opening  685  can be defined entirely within only one of the respective engagement surfaces  691  or  692  as desired. 
     Further optionally, when the installation tool  660  is used with certain types of boards, less of the second opening  685  can be defined in the respective secondary engagement surface  692 , particularly where the tongue  601  of the respective board through which the fasteners is to be advanced is thin, or where the material from which the board is constructed is weak or prone to bubbling, splitting, expanding or bulging when a hole is bored through it and/or when a fastener is advanced into it. 
     With reference to  FIG. 37 , a configuration of the tool  660  is shown that advances the fastener so that it is generally a sufficient distance from certain portions of the tongue. For example, as shown, the tongue lower surface  609  intersects the side surface  608  at a corner  609 C. The bore  688  is angled and configured so that when the guide  680  advances the fastener  110 , it does not bore a hole or advance the fastener along a path that intersects or otherwise damages or passes through the corner  609 C. If it did, then in such an embodiment, the fastener likely would protrude from the corner  609 C into the space defined between the side surface  608  and the tongue lower surface  609 . Accordingly, in such a case, when another board is placed with its groove  613  adjacent the tongue  601 , the fastener likely would interfere with the inter-fitting of the tongue in the groove, and thus the boards could not be easily closely joined. 
     When using the installation tool  660  with certain materials, it can be desirable that the fastener  110  and its line of advancement are distanced sufficiently from the corner  609 C. For example, with certain wood boards that are prone to bulge or split when a fastener advances through them, the bore  688  can be angled and distanced from the corner  609 C, again as shown in  FIG. 37 . This can prevent unnecessary damage to or bulging of material adjacent the corner  609 C. Again, that damage to or bulging of material possibly can interfere with the inter-fitment of the tongue  601  into a corresponding groove  613  of another board. 
     As shown in  FIG. 39 , the installation tool  660  can be configured so the head of the fastener  110 , upon full installation, is recessed inward, into the board, beyond the corner  603  where the side surface  608  and the upper tongue surface  604  meet. In this manner, the head of the fastener  110  does not interfere with the inter-fitment of the tongue  601  with a groove  613  defined by another board. 
     With further reference to  FIGS. 36 and 34A , the guide  680  will now be further described. The guide  680  shown there, more particularly the head  696 , can include a work piece upper surface engager  698  that is generally transverse to the primary engagement surface  691 . This work piece upper surface engager can likewise be disposed at some angle ε. This angle ε can be 90 degrees as shown, and can generally correspond to a board having an upper surface  611  generally perpendicular to a side surface  608  distal from the intersecting corner of these surfaces, which is common to many boards, and in particular to many tongue in groove type boards. If desired, however, the angle ε between the work piece upper surface engager  698  and the primary engagement surface  691  can vary optionally from about 75° to about 115°, further optionally about 80° to about 110°, even further optionally about 85° to about 105°, or at other ranges depending on the particular application and the configuration of the board. 
     The work piece upper surface engager  698  can define a first recess  699 . This recess can be curvilinear or partially rounded as shown. Alternatively, it can be of an angular or rectangular shape, depending on the application. Generally this recess enables the work piece upper surface engager  698  to engage the upper surface  611  of the work piece  602  even when the corner or intersection of the upper surface  611  of the work piece and the side surface  608  is irregular, bowed, damaged, and/or bulging. 
     The work piece upper surface engager  698  also can generally be planar as shown or it can be of a rounded or other curvilinear shape. Generally, it can contact the upper surface  611  of the work piece, so in many circumstances, it can be of a planar or rounded (concave or convex), non-point contact configuration. Accordingly, without a pointed contact portion, the engager  698  can be prevented from marring or gouging the upper surface  611  of the work piece if forcibly engaged against that surface. 
     As shown in  FIGS. 34A and 36 , the engagement head  696  of the guide  680  also can define a tongue recess  693  positioned adjacent the secondary engagement surface  692 . Indeed, the secondary engagement surface can bound a portion of the tongue recess  693  if desired. The second recess  693  can be oversized, that is, larger in dimension than the size of the tongue  601 . With such an oversized recess  693 , the engagement head  696  can fit over different portions of the same tongue that are of varying dimension or misshaped, and can fit over tongues of different boards that are of varying dimension or misshaped. 
     Generally, the recess  693  is of a rounded internal configuration so that if it engages certain portions of the surface portions or surfaces of the tongue  601 , it will not gouge or mar the tongue, which potentially could impair the fitment of a tongue in a corresponding groove. Of course, the structure of the recess can be modified so that it does include angled corners or intersecting surfaces that mate perfectly or generally accommodate the different surfaces of the tongue  601 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 36 , the head  696  also can include a guide foot  695  that extends from the head, optionally beyond the bore  680 . The guide foot can be configured to project under the tongue  601 . For example, the guide foot  695  can extend forwardly under the lower surface  609  of the tongue  601  so that it almost abuts, and in some cases does abut, the side surface  608  of the work piece when the guide  680  is appropriately placed adjacent the work piece  602 . As shown, however, there can be a gap G established between the side surface  608  and the outermost portion of the guide foot  695  even when the guide is positioned with the bore  680  precisely aligned and positioned adjacent the side surface  608  and/or tongue  601 . 
     In operation, the guide foot  695  can act as a spacer to properly space the corner  697  of the guide  680 , or more particularly the bore  688 , from the substrate  606  upon which the work piece  602  is positioned. Accordingly, a user can slide the guide  680  along the substrate  606 , and more particularly slide the guide foot  695  along the substrate  606 , until the tongue  601  registers in the tongue recess  693 . At this point, the user can slightly angle or move the guide  680  so that the intersection  697  and the respective bore  688  aligns with and registers with the respective corner  603  or surface of the work piece to facilitate proper advancement of the fastener  110  into the work piece  602 . 
     Returning to  FIGS. 34A and 36-37 , the guide  680  can define a material ejection port  683  that is similar in function, structure and location to the material ejection ports discussed above in connection with the other embodiments herein. Optionally, the material ejection port  683  can be located within a guide window  687  that is defined by the guide  680 . The window  687  can extend from one side surface of the guide to the other side surface of the guide if desired. The window  687  can be configured and sized large enough so that material  1004  ejected from a hole bored by a respective fastener  110  can exit the material ejection port  683  and further exit the guide  680  through the window  687  on one or both sides of the guide  680 . 
     Operation of the third alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool  660  will be explained with reference to  FIGS. 34, 35 and 36-39 . Generally, the fastener installation tool  660  can be used to install a fastener of any of the types described herein, or other conventional fasteners. To begin installation, the tool  660  is positioned adjacent the board  602 . As noted above, the guide foot  695  can engage the substrate  606  and can be slid across the substrate until the guide foot  695  is inserted generally under the tongue  601 . If helpful, the guide  680  can be slightly rotated to position the work piece upper surface engager  698  against the upper surface  611  of the board. The guide also can further be pressed with a force F 20  ( FIG. 36 ) so that the bore  688 , the second opening  685 , and more generally the corner  697  is positioned in close engagement with the corner  603  of the work piece between the tongue  601  and side surface  608 . 
     With the work piece upper surface engager  698  generally engaging the upper surface  611  of the work piece  602 , the longitudinal axis  600  of the bore can be aligned with that upper surface at angle σ-2. The angle σ-2 can vary optionally from about 25° to about 65°, further optionally about 35° to about 55°, even further optionally about 40° to about 50°, or at other ranges depending on the particular application and the configuration of the board. 
     Alternatively or in addition to the work piece upper surface engager  698  engaging the upper surface  611  of the work piece, the angle σ- 2  can be established by engagement of the guide foot  695  with the substrate  606  or the side surface  608  of the board  602 . In this manner, the engagement head  696  becomes engaged sufficiently with the board  602  for installation of the fastener. 
     In another step, a force F 20  can be applied to the tool  660  by a user, and a fastener  110  can be inserted in the bore  680 . The fastener can engage the corner  603  of the work piece when placed in the bore  680 . The fastener  110  can be engaged by a driving tool (not shown), such as a drill, screwdriver, wrench or other rotating tool, which rotates the fastener. 
     As shown in  FIG. 37 , as the fastener  110  is rotated, material  1004  can be ejected from the material ejection port  683  and further out through the guide window  687 . The position of the guide  680  and engagement head  696  can be maintained throughout the fastener advancing operation. 
     As shown in  FIG. 38 , the fastener  110  is further advanced so that it passes through the work piece  602  and into the underlying substrate  606 , passing from side surface  608  through lower surface  607  and eventually into the substrate  606 . As shown in  FIG. 39 , the fastener  110  continues to be advanced until it attains the fully advanced position noted in the embodiments herein, at which point the guide  660  can be moved. When the first work piece is sufficiently fastened to the substrate  606 , the tool  660  can be removed. 
     As shown in  FIG. 40 , with the tool removed, a second work piece  602 ′ can be placed on the substrate and slid so that the tongue of the first work piece  602  fits within the recess  613 ′ of the second work piece  602 ′, and interlocks with the first work piece  602 . When so interlocked, the second work piece  602 ′ can be fastened with one or more additional fasteners using the tool  660  as described in connection with the first work piece  602 . This process can be repeated for multiple work pieces to fasten them to the substrate. 
     VIII. Fourth Alternative Tool and Method Embodiment 
     A fourth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool and related method is illustrated in  FIG. 42  and generally designated  760 . The installation tool shown there is similar in construction and operation to the embodiments described above with several exceptions. For example, the tool  760  can includes only a single guide  780 . To the guide, a handle  761  can be attached, however, the handle  761  can extend transversely to the length of the work piece  602 . For example, the handle  761  can extend rearwardly from the guide  780  upward and over the upper surface  611  of the work piece  602 . The handle can be ergonomically shaped and can include a base support  763  that extends downwardly to a base  765 . The base  765  can extend toward and can be connected to the head  796  of the guide  780 . The base  765  can be configured to engage the upper surface  611  of the work piece  602 . If desired, the base can include a lower surface  766  that is contiguous with the work piece upper surface engager  798 . Indeed, the two surfaces  766  and  798  can be continuous and can form a generally planar surface. Operation of this embodiment is similar to the embodiments described above and therefore not be described again here. 
     IX. Fifth Alternative Tool and Method Embodiment 
     A fifth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool and related method is illustrated in  FIGS. 43-45  and generally designated  860 . The installation tool shown there is similar in construction and operation to the embodiments described above with several exceptions. 
     For example, the tool  860  is configured to work in conjunction with an integral or selectively attachable driving tool  810 , such as a drill (cordless or electric) or other device capable of rotating the fastener for advancement into boards. The tool  860  is also configured to automatically and sequentially feed fasteners for advancement into work pieces to join those work pieces with one another or a substrate. Further, the tool  860  can be configured so that a user thereof can operate the tool and install fasteners from a standing or otherwise elevated position, which can alleviate discomfort or the difficulties associated with having to bend over and install the fasteners. 
     The tool  860  can include a guide  880  which defines a bore  888  and includes a head  896  to engage the board  602  so that a fastener  1108  can be advanced into and/or through the work piece  602  to connect it to the substrate  606  as described in connection with the embodiments herein. The guide  880 , however, can be connected to an extension  820  which is further joined with the driving tool  810 . A magazine  840  can be joined with the extension  820  so that multiple fasteners  110 C stored in the magazine  840  can be sequentially fed into the extension  820  and/or the guide  880 , and subsequently advanced into the board  602 . 
     The extension  820  can define an extension bore  824 , which can be sized and positioned to receive the next-to-be-advanced, or succeeding fastener  1108  therein. The extension bore  824  can be further configured to receive a chuck or tool extension  814  that is joined with and designed to be rotated by the driving tool  810 . The extension  814  can extend from the head  812  of the driving tool  810  toward the guide  880  to a position adjacent the guide  880 . The extension can also be reciprocally mounted in the extension bore, as described below. 
     The extension  820  can further include a biasing element  826 , for example a spring or compressible/rebounding material, which is mounted therein. The biasing element  826  can be positioned so that it engages and seats against a stop  827 . Opposite the stop  827 , the biasing element engages the head  812  of the driving tool  810 . Although not shown, the head  812  can include a locking element to prevent the base  812  from being completely withdrawn from the extension  820 . Of course, where it is desirable that the base and driving tool  810  be quickly and easily separable, any desired decoupling element can be utilized to provide such a connection. 
     A fastener supply container or magazine  840  can be joined with the extension  820 . As shown, the magazine  840  can be offset from the extension  820  by some predetermined angle π. This angle π can range optionally from about 1° to about 45°, further optionally about 3° to about 30°, even further optionally about 4° to about 20°, still further optionally about 5° to about 15°, or other ranges of angles as desired. 
     Generally, the magazine  840  can include a first end which may include a cap  842  to contain and store fasteners  110 C therein. The magazine  840  can include a second end  844  that is joined with the extension  820 , optionally near the guide  880 . The magazine  840  can be of a length sufficient to store multiple fasteners  110 C head to point or one on top of another. Although not shown, if desired, the magazine could be modified to store a coil, strip or roll of collated fasteners that are linked together with some sort of linking element, such as wire, a coil, tape, or other construction. 
     Returning to  FIG. 43 , the second end  844  of the magazine  840  can be attached so that the magazine  840  generally is in feeding communication with the extension bore  824  and/or the bore  888  of the guide  880 , and so the fasteners  110 C can be sequentially fed into these elements. To prevent multiple fasteners  110 C from dumping into the extension bore  824  and/or guide bore  880 , the tool  860  can include a feed mechanism  832  that meters and precisely feeds the fasteners. The feed mechanism  832  can include an actuator bar  833  which is joined with a plate, door or hatch  836  at one end, and coupled to the biasing element  826  and/or head  812  of the driving tool  810  at the opposite end. Upon actuation of the head  812  or driving tool in general, and/or its movement into the extension  820 , the operating bar  833  moves the plate  832  downward as shown in  FIGS. 44 and 46 , out of the way of the opening  835  in the extension  820 . Accordingly, a subsequent fastener  110 C can be fed through the feed aperture  835  defined by the extension  820 , and into the position shown in  FIG. 43  when the chuck  814  is appropriately retracted. Of course, there can be other types of feed mechanisms used with the tool  860  that can sequentially feed the fasteners  110 C into the guide  880  to ready them for installation in a work piece  602 . 
     With reference to  FIGS. 43-45 , the operation of the tool  860  will now be described in further detail. In operation, a user grasps the driving tool  810  and positions the guide  680  generally in the upright configuration shown in  FIG. 43 . The user then slides the guide foot  865  of the guide  880  along the substrate  606 , which in this case can be a subfloor or other flooring or base. The user slides the foot  865  until it is positioned adjacent the tongue  601 , optionally under the tongue. Conveniently, the horizontal F 22  and vertical F 23  forces exerted by a user to engage the engaging head  896  with the work piece  602  can correspond to the natural movements of the user simply pushing the driving tool  810  and tool  860  toward and against the board. 
     With the bore  888  satisfactorily positioned adjacent the work piece  602 , for example, with the second opening  885  adjacent the work piece side surface  608  and/or tongue  601 , the user can further push the drive tool  810  with a force F 24 , which in turn pushes the tool head  812  against the biasing element  826  to compress it. This enables the chuck  814  to travel and move toward the work piece  602  within the bore  824 . As the driving tool  810  is pushed with a force F 24 , the chuck  814  can be rotated by the driving tool  810 . In turn, the end of the chuck  814 , which can include a drive feature mating with the fastener  1108 , can engage that fastener  1108  and rotate it. As the fastener  1108  rotates, it advances into the work piece  602  and optionally the substrate  606  in a manner discussed in the embodiments herein. 
     As the force F 24  continues to be applied, the head  810  can move farther into the extension  820 , thereby enabling the chuck  814  to continue to move with and engage the fastener, optionally fully advancing the fastener into the work piece  602  until it obtains the configuration shown in  FIG. 45 . When the fastener  1108  is fully installed, the user can remove the force F 24 , in which case the biasing element  824  engages the head  812  and moves it away from the stop  827 . Accordingly, the chuck  814  is retracted from the guide  880 , and reciprocates away from the bore  888 . Likewise, the feed mechanism  832  is activated so that the plate  836  opens the feeding aperture  835  and the next in line or subsequent fastener  110 C is fed into the extension bore  824  and/or the guide bore  888  so that fastener is readied for advancement into the same work piece or into another work piece which can be laid adjacent the illustrated work piece and interlocked therewith via the respective tongue and groove features of those work pieces. The process can be continued until the substrate is adequately covered. 
     If desired, as shown in  FIG. 43 , a first work piece  602  can be fastened down with a fastener  110 A. Alternatively, and/or additionally, the end including the groove  613  of the work piece  602  can be placed adjacent a wall to start the application of multiple tongue and groove work pieces. Optionally, the components of the tool of the above embodiment can be incorporated into any other embodiments herein. Likewise, the components of any tool embodiment herein can be combined in virtually any combination with any other tool embodiment as desired. 
     X. Sixth Alternative Tool and Method Embodiment 
     A sixth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool and a related method is illustrated in  FIGS. 46-49  and generally designated  2060 . The installation tool shown there is similar in construction and operation to the embodiments described above with several exceptions. 
     For example, as shown in  FIG. 46 , the installation tool  2060  includes a frame  2062  optionally including a handle  2061 , and a guide  2080 . The frame  2062  can include a bottom surface  2069  that is adapted to engage a top surface  2011  of work pieces  2102  and/or  2103 , which can be in the form of boards. 
     The tool  2060  of the sixth alternative embodiment is suited for any board, or other type of work piece as described herein. Optionally, however, the boards  2102  and  2103  can be particular types of boards if desired. These boards can be constructed from a material that with time, shrinks, that is, one or more of the board dimensions, such as width, thickness and/or length, decreases. As one example, the board can be constructed from wet, treated lumber. As the lumber dries over time, the board can shrink in width, thickness and/or length. This type of board is referred to herein as a “shrinkable board.” Such a shrinkable board, over time, is prone to reduce or shrink in dimension, e.g., width  2077 , and/or height  2078  ( FIG. 46 ) by 0.5%, 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, or more of the original dimension, depending on the particular material from which the shrinkable board is constructed. 
     As shown in  FIG. 46 , the work piece  2102 , also referred to as the second board  2102 , can include an upper surface  2011 , a lower surface  2017 , and side surfaces  2108  and  2079 . The side surface  2108  can transition to the upper surface at an upper corner  2109 , and to the lower surface  2017  at the lower corner  2110 . As shown, the upper and lower corners,  2109  and  2110 , can include a gradual radius which can be anywhere from a 1/32″ radius to a 4″ radius, or optionally a ¼″ radius to a 2″ radius, or further optionally a ½″ radius. Although shown as including a radius, any of the corners, for example, corners  2109 ,  2109 A, or  2119 , can alternatively be configured to include a compound angle or compound curved configuration. Even further optionally, the corners can be straight so that the side surfaces and upper surfaces of the respective work pieces meet at about a 90° angle. 
     Returning to the installation tool  2060 , the bottom surface  2069  of the tool  2060  can be joined with the frame  2062 , and the frame joined with the handle  2061 , so that a user can exert different forces on the tool. These forces can be transferred through the bottom surface  2069  to one or more boards. The tool can include a guide  2080 , which can be of the constructions described above and herein, and can define a longitudinal angled bore axis  2400  which extends along a length of the guide  2080 , generally through an angled bore  2088  defined by the guide. As with the other embodiments herein, the angled bore  2088  can be configured to accommodate and constrain a rotating fastener, and can extend from a first opening  2084  to a second opening  2085 . The angled bore  2088  can be positioned so that it is at a non-orthogonal angle, or generally offset from a right angle, relative to the upper surfaces of the respective boards when the tool is readied for advancing the fastener. This angle can be the same as the angles described in connection with other embodiments herein. The first opening  2084  can be configured to receive a fastener, for example, fasteners  10 ,  110 ,  210  and/or  310  herein, or other fasteners as desired, and can operate as an entrance into which the fastener can be inserted in the tool  2060 . The second opening  2085  can serve as an exit through which the fastener exits the tool  2060  as it advances into a work piece. 
     The fastener guide  2080  also can be configured to include a material ejection port  2083  that is in communication with the angled bore  2088 . The material ejection port  2083  can be a hole that is located between the first opening  2084  and the second opening  2085 . The precise location of the material ejection port  2083  and its dimension can be selected based on the material to be augured or otherwise ejected or evacuated out from the angled bore  2088 . As illustrated, the material ejection port is positioned generally above the bottom surface  2069  of the frame  2062 , and can be about ½″ long. Of course, it can be of other dimensions, for example about ⅛ to about ¼ of an inch in length. Generally, it can be of a dimension that is sufficient to allow material augured by a fastener  110  to eject from the port  2083 . 
     The material ejection port  2083  can be dimensioned and located so that it is defined on the underside of the angled bore  2088  so that the material drops out from the bore via gravity through the port. The material ejection port  2083  can be large enough to drop out fibers or other material augured from the work pieces, yet small or short enough so that a screw inserted into the angled bore  2088  from the first opening  2084  will not have its end drop out from, or otherwise protrude, or become hung up in the ejection port  2083  while the screw moves toward the second opening  2085 . 
     Optionally, the material ejection port can serve to remove or eject bored material from the angled bore to reduce some or all of the amount of material pulled back into the pre-bored hole by the fastener, which in some cases can cause damage, such as splitting or bulging of the work piece in the area surrounding the fastener. For example, the material ejection port can enable material augered up from the work piece to be ejected away from the threads and shaft of the fastener. In cases where the material ejection port is absent, or otherwise does not facilitate ejection of the material from the bore, and the head of the fastener is dimensioned so that it is almost the same dimension as the angled bore, the head might capture and drag all the pre-bored material back into the hole as the head advances toward the hole. That material would be captured in the space between the shaft and threads, and the walls of the angled bore, with the head acting like a cap or piston to pull the augered material between it and the work piece back into the pre-bored hole. With the material ejection port, the material augered or removed from the hole is ejected from the bore so that there is minimal, if any, augered or removed material for the head to pull into the hole. In turn, this can reduce the likelihood of damage to the work piece around the area of the hole caused by the material entering the hole, possibly along with the components of the fastener. Of course, in certain applications where material might not readily be pulled into the hole by the fastener, the material ejection port can be eliminated. 
     As illustrated in  FIG. 46 , the tool  2060  also includes an alignment projection  2090  that projects about 1/32 inch to about ½ inch, further optionally about ⅛ inch to about ¼ inch from the bottom  2069  of the tool  2060 . The precise distance of the projection of this alignment projection  2090  can vary depending on the particular board with which the tool  2060  is used. For example, when the tool  2060  is used in conjunction with a shrinkable board, the preselected distance from which the alignment projection  2090  extends from the lower surface  2069  of the tool is selected so that the projection can at least partially fit between opposing corners  2109  and  2119  of adjacent first and second work pieces  2103  and  2102 , respectively, without extending between or promoting the formation of a gap between the first work piece  2103  and the and second work piece  2102 . 
     Optionally, the alignment projection can generally be in the shape of a triangle having a generally rounded, downwardly projecting terminal end. If desired, the alignment projection can be in the form of an isosceles triangle, or an equilateral triangle, or other triangle depending on the application. The terminal end at the lowermost portion of the triangle can be rounded or curved so that it does not mar or gouge boards which it contacts. 
     The alignment projection  2090  can be configured so that the angled bore  2088  terminates generally at the alignment projection  2090 , with the second opening  2085  being formed substantially entirely within an inner engagement surface  2092  of the alignment projection  2090 . The inner engagement surface  2092  can transition to the bottom surface  2069  of the installation tool  2060 , optionally without forming a portion of the bottom surface  2069 , and further optionally along a radius or fillet. 
     The alignment projection  2090  also can include an outer engagement surface  2093  positioned opposite the inner engagement surface  2092 . The outer engagement surface  2093  can transition to the inner engagement surface  2092  generally at a terminal end  2097  of the alignment projection. The terminal end can be rounded and/or curved when viewed from a side view as illustrated so that it does not mar or gouge boards which it contacts. Optionally, the terminal end can include a radius R 10  ( FIGS. 51, 52 ) between about 0.1 mm to about 50 mm, further optionally between about 1 mm to about 20 mm, and even further optionally between about 2 mm to about 10 mm, or other radii as desired. Further optionally, the terminal end can include multiple compound radii or angled intersecting portions to provide the rounded effect as illustrated. 
     With reference to  FIG. 51 , the precise angle between the inner and outer engagement surfaces, as well as the angle of the longitudinal axis  2400  relative to the engagement surfaces can be preselected based on the desired location at which the fastener will engage and advance into the corner and/or side surface of a board. The angle between the inner and outer engagement surfaces can vary, optionally from about 10° to about 90°, further optionally about 35° to about 65°, even further optionally about 40° to about 50°, or at other ranges depending on the particular application. Further, these surfaces can be non-parallel with one another if desired. Generally, the inner engagement surface  2092  and or the rounded or curved terminal end  2097  can be configured to engage the second board  2102  on which the bottom surface  2069  of the tool  2060  rests or is immediately adjacent or near when the tool  2060  is in position atop the board for installing a fastener. 
     As shown, the inner engagement surface  2092  optionally can be at about a 90° angle relative to the bottom surface  2069 , but other angles from about 80° to about 100° can be selected. The inner engagement surface  2092  can be configured to directly engage the upper corner  2109  or side surface  2008  of the second board. 
     The outer engagement surface  2093  of the alignment projection can be at an angle relative to the bottom surface  2069  of optionally about 30° to about 70°, further optionally about 40° to about 60°, and even further optionally about 45°. The precise angle can be selected depending on the desired angle α 2  ( FIG. 51 ) at which the longitudinal axis and or corresponding trajectory of the fastener  110  is desired to be oriented relative to the side surface  2108 . 
     The outer engagement surface  2093  of the alignment projection  2090  can be configured to directly engage the first corner  2119  and side surface  2118  of the first board  2103  as illustrated in  FIG. 51 . This engagement of the outer engagement surface  2093  against the corner  2119  and/or side surface  2118  effectively can set the height D 16  ( FIG. 51 ) at which the fastener  110  is advanced into the side surface  2108  or corner  2109  of the second board  2102  during a fastener installation operation with the tool. This engagement of the outer engagement surface  2093  against the corner  2119  and/or side surface  2118  can also set the angle α 2  and/or orient the longitudinal axis along a desired fastener trajectory. 
     As shown in  FIGS. 46-52 , the entire bottom surface  2069  of the tool can be void of any spacer projections, that is, any projections which are configured to be positioned between the side surfaces of adjacent boards or work pieces to establish a predetermined distance therebetween, or a gap between the work pieces. With such a construction, the installation tool  2060  of this embodiment is constructed so that it is generally incapable of establishing a gap between adjacent installed boards, and in particular the side surfaces of those installed boards. In other words, the bottom surface of the tool itself can be void of any structures that extend downwardly along opposing side surfaces of the board  2102 , when the tool  2060  is installed atop the board, with the bottom surface  2069  engaging the upper surface  2011  of that board. Further, the tool  2060  and/or bottom surface  2069  can be void of any projection that extends down along either the side surfaces  2108  or  2079  of the board. Of course, if desired, the alignment projection  2090  can extend downwardly adjacent one or more of the upper corners  2109 ,  2109 A of the board  2102  to assist in aligning the guide  2080  with a desired trajectory of the fastener  110 . 
     For example, the alignment projection  2090  can extend downwardly from the bottom surface  2069  of the tool  2060  a preselected distance so that when a user exerts a force F 25  ( FIG. 48 ) on the tool  2060 , via the handle  2061 , the alignment projection  2090  assists in pushing the second board  2102  adjacent the first board  2103 , and more specifically, contacting the side surfaces  2108  and  2118  at least along a portion of the middle portions  2108 M and  2118 M of those respective boards. Optionally, during this application of force F 25 , the inner engagement surface  2092  transfers a substantial portion of the force F 25  to the board  2102 , which is further transferred to the board  2103 . 
     The frame  2062  and the other various components of the tool  2060  can be constructed from stainless steel, steel, other metals, composites and/or polymers. For example, as mentioned above, the guide  2080  and angled bore  2088  can be constructed from steel, while the like components of the frame  2062 , such as the handle  2061  and alignment projection  2090  can be constructed from a polymeric material such as a high impact resistant plastic. 
     With reference to  FIGS. 47-49 , a method for installing one or more boards, in the form of shrinkable boards, or other boards, with the installation tool  2060  will now be described. As shown in  FIG. 47 , a first board  2103  is first joined with a substructure  2106  with fasteners  110 , or any other fasteners described herein or other conventional fasteners. These fasteners  110  can be installed at an angle, as described above, relative to the side surfaces of the board  2103  using the installation tool  2060 , or at some other angle. For example, optionally, the board  2103  can be installed with the fasteners alternatively extending from the top surface of the board through the bottom surface, generally orthogonal to the board. 
     With the first board  2103  installed, the second board  2012  is moved, generally in the direction  2101  toward the first board  2103 . The second board  2102  is positioned so that the gap  2105  between the side surfaces  2118  and  2108  of the respective boards is closed along a substantial length, for example all the length, of the respective boards  2103  and/or  2102 . The second board  2102  is moved adjacent the first board  2103  so that the first side surface  2118  engages and/or directly contacts the second side surface  2108  of the second board  2102 . In this type of contact, there is substantially no gap between the respective first and second boards. Generally, the middle portions  2118 M and  2108 M of the respective first and second boards  2102  and  2103  directly engage or contact one another as shown in  FIGS. 48, 50 and 51 . In this engaging or contacting configuration, however, the board corners  2109  and  2119  can still be a distance from one another. Even though the board corners are distanced from one another, the boards are still considered to be positioned adjacent one another, directly engaging and/or contacting one another, so that there is no gap between the first and second boards. 
     Optionally, the movement of the second board  2102  can be either linear along the upper surface  2107  of the substructure  2106 , as shown in  FIG. 47 , or alternatively the movement can include a combined pivoting and sliding motion. For example, the side surface  2108  of the second board  2102  can be placed adjacent the side surface  2118  of the first board  2103  with the second board  2102  generally at an angle of optionally about 20° to about 60° relative to the upper surface  2107  of the substructure  2106 . The second board  2102  then can be moved or pivoted about its lowermost corner  2110  until it is positioned immediately adjacent the first board  2103  with the respective side surfaces  2108  and  2118  engaging or otherwise contacting one another. 
     In some cases, the shrinkable boards with which the installation tool  2060  is used may be warped, so that it is impossible to engage the respective first and side surfaces of adjacent boards in complete contact or in immediate adjacent engagement with one another along the entire lengths of the boards. In such cases, despite parts of the boards in warped regions not being in contact with one another, the boards and their respective side surfaces still may be considered to be in substantial engagement and/or contact with one another as those terms are used herein. 
     As shown in  FIGS. 46 and 51 , the respective outermost portions of the side surfaces  2108  and  2118 , in particular, the middle portions  2118 M and  2108 M, can be aligned in parallel and can contact one another within the contact plane  2013 . This contact plane can correspond with the region of contact between the immediately adjacent side surfaces of the first and second shrinkable boards  2102  and  2103 . 
     A method of installing shrinkable or other boards using the tool  2060  is further shown in  FIGS. 48-51 . Referring to  FIG. 48 , the installation tool  2060  is positioned with its bottom surface  2069  engaging the upper surface  2011  of the second board  2102 . The alignment projection  2090  is positioned so that its engagement surface  2092  generally engages and squarely faces the corner  2109 A and/or the opposing side surface  2079 , also referred to sometimes herein as the third side surface. In this configuration, the longitudinal axis  2400  of the bore  2088  is generally aligned with the corner  2109 A and/or at least a portion of the side surface  2079 . The user can exert a force F 25  against the side surface  2079  through the handle  2061  and frame, ultimately through the alignment projection  2090 . 
     Optionally, the inner engagement surface  2092  engages the corner  2109 A and/or the side surface  2079 , with that force being applied through that engagement surface to those respective features of the board  2102 . This force F 25  can move the second board  2102  into close contact or improved contact or engagement with first boards  2103 , and optionally can provide improved engagement between the side surfaces  2108  and  2119  of these respective boards. The bottom surface  2069  of the tool  2060  can engage the upper surface  2011  of the second board  2102 , and via friction between the bottom surface  2069  and the upper surface  2011 , the force F 25  on the installation tool  2060  can exert a further improved engagement or contact between the side surfaces of the respective boards. 
     With the second board  2102  forcibly pushed against the first board  2103  as shown in  FIG. 48 , and the respective side surfaces  2118  and  2108  sufficiently engaged and/or contacting one another, for example along their middle portions  2108 M and  2118 M, a fastener  110  can be advanced along the longitudinal axis  2400 , through the second board  2102  and into the substructure  2106  in a manner as described in any of the embodiments described herein. With the board so installed, there effectively is no gap between the side surfaces of the first and second boards upon such installation. 
     With reference to  FIG. 49 , which is a close up of the fastener  110  being installed in the board  2102 , the tool  2060  is configured so that the inner engagement surface  2092  is mounted against the upper most corner  2109 A of the board  2102 , and optionally engages at least a portion of the side surface  2079 . In this configuration the bottom surface  2069 , and more particularly the secondary bottom surface portion  2069 A engages the upper surface  2011  of the work piece  2102 . The longitudinal axis  2400  of the bore  2088  is aligned so that the fastener  110  advances along a trajectory that is generally at an angle α 1  relative to the side surface  2079  of the work piece  2102 . This angle α 1  can be optionally about 30° to about 80°, further optionally about 40° to about 70°, and further optionally about 45° to 50° or other angles depending upon the precise configuration of the corner  2109  and the side surface  2079 . Generally, in the configuration shown in  FIG. 49 , the outer engagement surface  2093  is outwardly disposed relative to the side surface  2079 . Optionally, the engagement surface  2093  does not engage any other work pieces or boards during the advancing operation shown in  FIG. 49  adjacent the side surface  2079  of the board opposite the first board  2103 . 
     With the fastener  110  positioned and tacking down the second board  2102  near the second side surface  2079 , the tool  2060  can be lifted so that the bottom surface  2069  disengages the upper surface  2011  of the board  2102 . The installation tool  2060  can be rotated 180°, generally rotated end for end, and the bottom surface  2069  can again be placed atop the upper surface  2011  of the second work piece  2102 . Upon such placement, the tool  2060  faces an opposite direction ( FIGS. 50-51 ) relative to the previous installation procedure ( FIG. 48 ). Depending on the profile of the alignment projection  2090 , the bottom surface  2069  can mount flush with top surface  2011  of the work piece  2102  ( FIGS. 46 and 52 ), or a portion of the bottom surface  2069 A can remain a preselected distance  2066  above the top surface  2011 , while a remaining portion  2069 B engages another portion of the upper surface  2011  of the work piece  2102  ( FIGS. 50 and 51 ). 
     As shown in  FIGS. 46, 50, 51 and 52 , the alignment projection  2090  does not establish a gap between the respective side surfaces  2118  and  2108 , or the middle portions  2118 M and  2108 M, of the respective first and second boards  2013  and  2012 . When a user applies a force F 26 , the alignment projection  2090  seats or wedges between the respective corners  2109  and  2119  of the work pieces, to align the longitudinal axis  2400  of the bore  2088  with a desired trajectory of the fastener  110 . If a significant amount of force is exerted, the distance  2066  between the bottom surface  2069   a  of the tool and the side surface  2008  of the board  2102 , atop which the tool  2060  is positioned, can be reduced to alter the angle of the longitudinal axis  2400  relative to the plane in which the upper surface  2011  of the work piece  2102  lays. 
     Optionally, where the alignment projection  2090  is wedged and between the corners  2109  and  2119 , the alignment projection can be said to be generally positioned substantially within the region or crevice formed between the corners  2109  and  2119 , but without extending below the crevice into a location adjacent or between the respective side surfaces of the first and second boards. Further optionally, the alignment projection can occupy the crevice between the upper board corners, but not a gap between the adjacent side surfaces of the boards. 
     With the alignment projection  2090  adequately wedged and between the corners  2109  and  2119 , the fastener  110  can be advanced along the longitudinal axis  2400  through the corner  2109  and/or side surface  2108 , further through the work piece  2102  and into the underlying substructure  2106  to secure the side of the board adjacent the side surface  2108  to the underlying substructure  2106 . This process can be repeated multiple times along a particular side surface of a work piece, over and over, to securely fasten the work piece to the underlying substructure  2106 . 
     A close-up view of the fastener advancement is shown in  FIG. 51 . There, as illustrated, the alignment projection  2090  is wedged between the corners  2109  and  2119  of the second work piece  2102  and the first piece  2103 , respectively. The outer engagement surface  2093  and or terminal end  2097  specifically engages the corner  2119  of the first board  2103 , while the inner engagement surface  2092  and or an opposing side of the terminal end engages the corner  2109  of the second board  2102 . In this particular embodiment, due to the configuration of the corners and the alignment projection  2090  from the bottom surface  2069 , the wedging action of the alignment projection  2090  does not enable the bottom surface  2069 , and more particularly the bottom surface portion  2069 A to directly engage the upper surface  2011  of the second work piece  2102 . 
     For example, as shown in  FIG. 51 , the bottom surface portion  2069 A is a distance  2066  from upper surface  2011  of the work piece  2102 . Accordingly, the bottom surface  2069  is generally disposed at an angle β 1  relative to the upper surface  2011  of the work piece  2102 . This angle can vary, but generally can be between 0.1° and about 30°, further optionally about 1° and about 15°. This contrasts the orientation of the bottom surface  2069 A/ 2069  shown in  FIG. 49 , where that bottom surface is generally coplanar with the upper surface  2011  of the board  2102 . As shown in  FIG. 51 , the bottom surface  2069  is disposed at a different angle relative to the upper surface  2011  than the angle shown in  FIG. 49  when the fastener is installed in the first corner  2109 A and/or side surface  2079  of the work piece  2102 , with the tool  2060  in a reverse orientation. 
     Optionally, the fastener shown in  FIG. 49  can be installed with the bottom surface  2069  disposed at a first angle relative to the upper surface  2011  of the work piece  2102 , generally coplanar with that surface, for example at a zero degree angle, while the second fastener shown in  FIG. 51  can be installed on an opposite side of the board with the bottom surface  2069  disposed at a second, greater angle β 1  relative to the upper surface  2011  of the board  2102 . 
       FIG. 51  also illustrates the angle α 2  along which the longitudinal axis  2400  is disposed relative to the side surface  2108  of the board  2102  into which the fastener  110  is advanced. The longitudinal axis  2400 , and thus the trajectory of the fastener  110 , is disposed at an angle α 2  relative to the side surface  2108 . That angle of advancement, relative to the side surface  2108  and/or the longitudinal axis  2400  relative to the side surface, is generally less than the corresponding angle α 1  shown in  FIG. 49 . Again, this is because the tool  2060  has been shifted upward by engagement of the alignment projection  2090  wedging between the corners  2119  and  2109 . The angle α 2  can be less than angle α 1  by about 1° to about 20°, further optionally about 2° to about 8°. Depending on the particular application, the relative difference between angle α 1  and angle α 2  on the opposite sides of the board  2102  can vary as desired. 
     As further shown in  FIG. 51 , the outer engagement surface  2093  and or terminal end  2097  engages the uppermost corner  2119  of the installed first work piece  2103 . It is this engagement that generally sets or establishes the trajectory, or line of advancement of the fastener, or generally orients the longitudinal axis  2400  of the bore relative to the corner  2109  and/or side surface  2108  of the second board. 
     The engagement of the outer engagement surface  2093 , and/or terminal end  2097  of the alignment projection  2090 , with the boards can vary depending on the particular profile of the corners  2119  and/or  2109 . For example, as shown in  FIG. 52 , the corners  2119 ′ and  2109 ′ of the first work piece  2103 ′ and second work piece  2102 ′ are of a greater/larger radius than the corners  2119  and  2109  of the work pieces in  FIG. 51 . In turn, the distance between these corners  2109 ′ and  2119 ′ is generally greater, however, no gap is formed between the respective side surfaces  2108 ′ and  2118 ′ or more particularly the middle portions  2108 M′ and  2118 M′. The alignment projection  2090  extends downwardly into the area established between the respective corners  2119 ′ and  2109 ′. The bottom surface  2069 , and more particularly the bottom surface portion  2069 A adjacent the alignment projection  2090 , engages the upper surface  2011 ′ of the board  2102 ′. In turn, this ensures that the fastener  110  is advanced into the board at a lower location on the side of the board  2102 ′. 
     For example, as shown in  FIG. 52 , the fastener  110  is advanced and enters the board  2102 ′ generally at a distance D 17  from the bottom surface  2017 ′ of the second board  2102 ′. This is due to the larger radius of the corner  2119 ′ and the alignment projection  2090  being able to be disposed further into the crevice or region between the respective corners  2119 ′ and  2109 ′. This contrasts the greater distance between the point of entry of the fastener  110  shown in  FIG. 51 . There, the fastener  110  enters the second board  2102  at a distance D 16 , which is greater than the distance D 17  in  FIG. 52 , because the alignment projection  2090  cannot extend sufficiently downward into the area between the respective corners  2119  and  2109 . The alignment projection  2090  interferes and wedges against those corners, preventing the bottom portion  2069 A from engaging the upper surface  2011  of the second board  2102 . Thus, the profile of the alignment projection  2090  of the installation tool  2090 , and more particularly the configuration of the outer engagement surface  2093 , can influence the height at which the fastener is advanced into the corner and/or side surface of the board relative to the bottom surface of the board. 
     The profile of the board and/or the profile of the alignment projection  2090  also can influence the angle at which the fastener  110  is advanced relative to the side surface  2108  of the board  2102 . For example, again referring to  FIG. 52 , with the larger radiused corners  2119 ′ and  2109 ′ of the boards  2103 ′ and  2102 ′, the angle α 3  between the respective longitudinal axis  2400  of the angled bore (which also corresponds to the trajectory or line of advancement of the fastener  110 ) is offset relative to the side surface  2108 ′ of the second board  2102 ′. Generally, that angle α 3  can correspond to or can be equal to the angle α 1  ( FIG. 49 ) such that the angles of the advanced fasteners relative to the respective side surfaces are about the same or equal. 
     This contrasts the geometries shown in  FIG. 51 , where the alignment projection  2090  wedged between the corners results in the bottom surface  2069  being raised a distance  2066  and at an angle β 1  relative to the top surface  2011 . There, the angle of advancement and the longitudinal axis  2400  is offset from the side surface at angle α 2 , which is different from angle α 1  in  FIG. 49 . In comparing  FIGS. 49 and 51 , when the tool  2060  is used to advance a first fastener into the second board  2102  having a relatively small radius inside corner, that first fastener in a first side of the second board  2102  is advanced at a first angle α 1 . However, a second fastener advanced in a second, opposite side of the second board  2102 , is advanced at a second, different, and generally smaller angle α 2 . Where, however, the radii of the corners of the boards are larger, like that shown in  FIG. 52 , the advancement of the first fastener in one side surface of the board  2079  ( FIG. 49 ) is at an angle α 1 , and that angle α 1  is generally the same or equal to an angle α 3  at which another fastener  110  is advanced adjacent the opposite side surface  2108 ′, as shown in  FIG. 52 . 
     Optionally, the distance from the lower surface of the board, where the fastener  110  enters the respective corners and/or side surfaces of the board, can vary depending on the size of the radii of the respective corners of the board, and/or can vary depending on the distance that the alignment projection  2090  extends from the bottom surface  2069  of the tool  2060 . Depending on the particular application, desired angle of advancement of the fastener, and the board to be fastened, the alignment projection and tool can be specifically configured to provide the desired fastening capabilities and advancement of the fasteners. Further optionally, the engagement of the outer engagement surface  3093  and/or terminal end  3097  with the corner  3119  of the first work piece, which may already be secured to the substrate with a fastener, can affect the depth or distance downward from the upper surface  2011  at which the fastener is advanced. This engagement can also affect the angle α 3  at which the fastener is advanced into the board. 
     After the fastener  110  fastens down the work piece adjacent the side surface  2108 , regardless of the configuration of the tool or board, that side surface  2108  is in substantial engagement and/or contact with the side surface  2118  of the first board  2103 . In other words, there is no gap established between these respective side surfaces  2108  and  2118 , other than the distance between the corner  2109  and  2119  and/or  2110  and  2111  ( FIGS. 46, 50, 51 ). Of course, with shrinkable boards, after time, those boards can dry and reduce in dimension as noted above. As they dry over a period of one week to three months, a gap can start to form between the work pieces  2103  and  2102 , and in particular the side surfaces and/or middle portions of the work pieces. 
     The above process of installing a second board adjacent a first board, engaging the side surface of the first board with the second board so that they remain substantially engaged and/or be in contact along the length of the board, while fastening an opposing side of the second board so that no gap is established between the opposing first side of a board, and then adjusting the tool to guide another fastener  110  into the side of the second board adjacent the first board can be repeated multiple times with multiple boards to produce a deck or flooring structure. 
     XI. Seventh Alternative Tool and Method Embodiment 
     A seventh alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool and related method is illustrated in  FIGS. 53-56  and generally designated  3060 . This embodiment, like that of the sixth alternative embodiment above can be well suited for use with shrinkable or other types of boards as described herein. The installation tool shown there is similar in construction and operation to the embodiments described above with several exceptions. 
     For example, as shown in  FIG. 53 , the installation tool  3060  includes a frame  3062  including a handle  3061  and first and second guides  3480  and  3580  at opposite ends of the frame. The installation tool can include a secondary handle  3064  that can move the guide  3580  similar to that in the second alternative embodiment above, shown in  FIGS. 27-30 , to provide a clamping effect on a board located adjacent the tool, for example, to clamp the board between a spacer and an alignment projection as described below. 
     The guide  3480  and respective spacer  3474  can be similar to the guide  480  and spacer  474  shown in figures of the second alternative embodiment. The opposing guide  3580  can generally be similar to the guide  580  in that embodiment as well with several distinctions. For example, instead of including a spacer  3574 , the guide  3580  can include an alignment projection  3090 . This alignment projection can include an inner engagement surface  3092  and an opposing outer engagement surface  3093  that are structured and function generally the same as that of the sixth alternative embodiment above. Indeed, the geometric configurations and angles between these respective surfaces can be identical to that of the sixth alternative embodiment described above if desired. For example, the inner engagement surface  3092  can define an opening through which a fastener exits to enter a board. That surface  3092  can be substantially planar and can be on the opposite side of the alignment projection  3090  from the other substantially planar outer engagement surface  3093 . The two engagement surfaces can be joined and transition to one another via the terminal end  3097 . As shown, this terminal end  3097  can also have the same function and configurations as those of the terminal end of the sixth alternative embodiment. 
     Optionally, all of the descriptions and features of the alignment projection in this embodiment, and its orientation, as well as its engagement with different features of shrinkable boards and/or work pieces are the same as those of the alignment projection of the sixth alternative embodiment of the installation tool  3060 . 
     The installation tool  3060  as shown in  FIG. 53  can also include an adjustment mechanism  3590  similar to that described in connection with the second alternative tool embodiment above. For example, the first adjustment mechanism  3590  can include stopper pins  3592 A and  3592 B. These respective stopper pins can be inserted through respective stopper pin holes  3596 A and  3596 B of a guide to hold the guide in place. As with the embodiments above, the guide  3580  can be removed and/or replaced for service or change out of the alignment projection  3090  for a spacer  3574 . The spacer, unlike the alignment projection, can be configured to extend between the sides of boards and establish a gap therebetween as a fastener is installed using the installation tool  3060 . 
     Optionally, the guides of the tool can be interchangeable so a first guide having a first alignment projection can be exchanged for a another guide having a differently shaped alignment projection or spacer that extends a different distance from the frame bottom surface than the first alignment projection. This can enable the same tool to be used with different types of boards, or to work in a particular manner to set particularly sized gaps or no gap between shrinkable boards upon installation. 
     Returning to  FIG. 53 , to remove or replace the guides, the adjustment mechanism  3590  can be removed from the guide  3580  by removing the stopper pins  3592 A and  3592 B from corresponding stopper pin holes of the guide. The guide is then removed in direction R 1 . The replacement guide  3580 ′ can be replaced in the same position in the frame  3062  in direction R 2 . With the second guide  3580 ′ in position, the respective stopper pins  3592 A and  3592 B can be installed so that they project through the stopper pin holes  3596 A and  3596 B. The adjustment mechanism  3590  can be resecured to the frame to hold the replaced second guide  3580 ′ block in position relative to the frame  3062 . 
     Operation of the installation tool  3060  in the seventh alternative embodiment will be described in more detail with reference to  FIGS. 54-56 . Generally, the installation and engagement of the alignment projection  3090  with the respective components of the boards is similar to that of the sixth alternative embodiment described above with a few exceptions. For example, as shown in  FIG. 54 , the installation tool  3060  is positioned over a second shrinkable board  3102  that is placed adjacent the first shrinkable board  3103 , generally with no gap being located between the first and second shrinkable boards. The respective side surfaces  3118  and  3108  engage and abut one another and specifically, the middle portions  3108 M and  3118 M engage and abut one another so that substantially no gap is established between the side surfaces of the first and second shrinkable boards  3103  and  3102 . Of course, where other types of boards are used, the same procedure for operating the installation tool can be implemented if appropriate. 
     As noted above, the tool  3060  is similar to that of the second alternative embodiment tool, so the alignment projection  3090  and spacer  3074  can be separated a distance by exerting a force counter to an internal bias member. This can be effected by pulling the second handle  3064  in direction F 27 . The alignment projection  3090  can be placed between the first corner  3119  of the first board  3103  and the second corner  3109  of the second board  3102 , with the spacer  3474  positioned adjacent a third side  3079  of the second shrinkable board  3102 . The bottom surface  3069  of the tool  3060  can rest on, or at least be adjacent, the upper surface  3011  of the second work piece  3102  as described in the sixth alternative embodiment above. The tool can be operated to release the handle in direction R 28 , which in turn enables the bias member to effect a clamping force via forces F 29  exerted by spacer  3474  on the third side  3079  and F 30  exerted by the alignment projection  3090  on the corner  3109  and/or side  3108 . 
     With the tool clamped in place, as shown in  FIG. 55 , the fastener  110  can be installed in the guide  3480  and advanced along a bore axis  3400  into the side surface  3079  of the third opposing side of the second board  3102 . The advancement can continue until the board  3102  is satisfactorily secured to the substrate  3106 . 
     Optionally, the installation tool  3060  can then be adjusted by pulling again on the handle  3064  with force F 27  to reduce the clamping forces on the board  3102 , then pushing downward with force F 31  as shown in  FIG. 55  to further drive the alignment projection  3090  into the crevice or region between the first  3119  and second  3109  corner. This force can be translated to a more localized force F 32  through the alignment projection, again to drive the projection into the crevice or region between the respective upper corners of the respective boards. This can be done to overcome any shifting in the tool while the fastener was driven into the third opposing side  3079 . It also can be done to precisely engage the outer engagement surface  3093  against the first corner  3119 , which in turn can set the appropriate depth D 18  down the corner and/or sidewall at which the fastener will be advanced into the same. Generally, this adjustment can set the angle α 4  at which the axis  3401  is set as well. Optionally, this angle can be the same as the angles α 2  and α 3  as discussed above. 
     With the outer engagement surface properly set and engaged with the corner  3119 , and the alignment projection generally in position between the corners, the handle  3064  can be released to exert a clamping force on the second shrinkable board  3102  as described above. Another fastener  110 ′ is installed in the second opposing guide  3580  and advanced generally along the longitudinal axis  3401  of the guide into the second opposing side  3108  and/or second corner  3109  of the second board  3102 . As described above and with the sixth alternative embodiment, the depth of the screw and/or the height at which it is installed in the corner  3109  or side surface  3108  of the second shrinkable board  3102  can be established by virtue of the engagement of the outer engagement surface  3093  with the first corner  3119  of the first board  3103 . Likewise, the respective angles of advancement can also be established in similar manners to that as the sixth alternative embodiment above. 
     During the advancement of the fastener  110 ′ at an angle through the second shrinkable board, the first side surface  3118  and second side surface  3108  are maintained in contact with one another. Further, immediately after the advancing and installation of the fasteners, these side surfaces remain in contact with one another as with the sixth alternative embodiment above. After the fasteners are installed, the tool can be moved along the second shrinkable board  3102  to install another set of fasteners in a similar fashion. This process can be repeated along the entire length of the board until the board is satisfactorily joined with the substructure  3106 . 
     XII. Eighth Alternative Tool and Method Embodiment 
     An eighth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool and related method is illustrated in  FIGS. 57-79  and generally designated  4060 . This embodiment, like the embodiments above can be well suited for use with shrinkable boards, or other types of boards as described herein. Moreover, this embodiment is also well suited for the types of fasteners in the embodiments described herein, as well as any other type of fasteners. For example, the tool can be used to advance the side angled fasteners  10 ,  110 ,  210 ,  310  at the respective advancement orientations and using the techniques herein, and/or conventional pointed-tip fasteners. The installation tool of the eighth alternative embodiment also is similar in construction and operation to the embodiments described above with several exceptions. 
     For example, as shown in  FIG. 57 , the installation tool  4060  includes a driving tool  4810  joined with an optional extension  4820  which is further joined with a feed mechanism  4832  and a nose assembly  4850 . The driving tool  4810  can be any of the driving tools described herein and can include or be associated with a drive element  4814  that extends from the driving tool  4810 , optionally through the extension  4820 , for engagement with fasteners of a collated strip  4905  in the nose assembly  4050 . The drive element  4814 , which as shown in  FIG. 71 , can be in the form of a chuck that engages drive features of the respective fasteners. Those drive features can be of the type described in connection with any of the fastener embodiments herein. The driving tool  4810  can be configured to exert a rotational force and rotate fasteners advanced by the tool  4060 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 57 , the extension  4820  can be an elongated bar of tubular shape, optionally hollow and of virtually any geometric cross section. Generally, the extension can be of a length sufficient to enable a user of the installation tool  4060  to grasp the driving tool  4810  and stand upright while installing fasteners in a board at a lower level, for example, in a board that is at or near the user&#39;s feet or some other distance from the user&#39;s hands. The extension  4820  and/or driving tool  4810  can also include a torque handle  4811  which the user can grasp to prevent unwanted torque or rotation of the installation tool  4060  or its components during an advancing operation. 
     The installation tool  4060  can include a feed mechanism  4832  joined with the extension  4820 , optionally at an end opposite the driving tool  4810 . Of course, where the extension is not included, the feed mechanism can be joined directly with the driving tool  4810 . The feed mechanism, also referred to as a feed, can be any conventional feed mechanism capable of sequentially advancing collated fasteners  4905  from a holder or container  4840  to the nose assembly  4846 . One example of a suitable feed mechanism for collated fasteners, and an associated extension tool and driving tool, is a Grabber® Super Drive Model 05, 55 or 75 Series, commercially available from Grabber Construction Products, Inc. of Alpine, Utah. Another example is a Grip-Rite® collated screw gun attachment, which is commercially available from PrimeSource Building Products, Inc. of Irving, Tex. Yet another suitable feed mechanism that can be used in conjunction with the tool herein is the P13KUE auto feed tool, which is available from PAM Fastening Technology, Inc., of Charlotte, N.C. 
     Optionally, the feed mechanism can include one or more teeth or gears  4032 A ( FIG. 71 ) that engage the collated fasteners  4905  and advance them toward the nose assembly  4846 . For example, the gear  4032 A can engage one or more slots  4906  ( FIG. 58 ) defined by a strip of material  4907  included in the collated fasteners  4905 . The feed mechanism  4832  can rotate the gear when a user pushes the driving tool  4810  in a downward motion, or some other motion depending on the feed, thereby engaging the slots and advancing the collated fasteners  4905  toward and/or through the nose assembly  4050 . 
     The feed mechanism  4032  can include a collated fastener holder  4840 . Although shown as an elongated channel member that engages the collated fastener strip, the holder  4840  can be in the form of a drum to hold a coil of collated fasteners or virtually any other configuration. Generally, the collated fastener holder  4840  is supported by a bracket extending forward of the feed. Although shown supporting the collated fasteners forward of the feed, the holder  4840  could alternatively support a supply of collated fasteners rearward of the feed  4832  and/or nose assembly  4050 , or off to a side, laterally displaced from the feed  4832  and/or nose assembly  4050 . Further, in some cases where a large supply of fasteners are not desired, the holder can be absent altogether from the tool, with a short strip of collated fasteners being fed through the nose assembly. 
     The collated fasteners  4905 , as mentioned above and optionally used in the illustrated embodiment, can include a strip of material  4907 . The material can be flexible, but sufficiently rigid to engage the head or other portion of fasteners associated with the strip. The material can be constructed from polymers, metals, composites, fabric, tape or any other structure capable of joining multiple fasteners side-by-side adjacent one another in a sequential orientation. One suitable strip of material is a Grip-Rite® flexible strip for collated screws, commercially available from PrimeSource Building Products, Inc. of Irving, Tex. 
     In the embodiments herein, the strip of material used to hold the collated fasteners is of a flexible nature so that it can generally bend and/or flex both along its longitudinal axis, that is, along its length, and transverse to its axis, that is, across its width, without significant force being applied to provide the bending or flexing. When attached to the strip, the heads of the fasteners are generally uniformly spaced from one another, but at a small distance, for example about 1 mm to about 10 mm, optionally about 2 mm to about 6 mm, due to the small size of the heads optionally described in the embodiments above. Due to the flexible nature of the strip, however, the tips of the fasteners joined with the strip can tend to be non-uniformly spaced. For example, the distances between the tips of adjacent fasteners on the strip  4907  can sometimes be located immediately adjacent and contact one another, while other adjacent fasteners can be significantly spaced, for example, double or triple the space between the heads of the same fasteners. Because of this inconsistent spacing between tips of fasteners, the nose assembly and respective features of the installation tool of the current embodiments are helpful in aligning the fasteners for precise installation into the corner and/or side surface of a board or other work piece as described below. 
     Turning now to  FIGS. 58-61 , the nose assembly  4050  will now be described. Generally, the nose assembly  4050  includes an attachment bracket  4053  that attaches the nose assembly  4050  to the feed mechanism  4832 , extension  4820  and/or driving tool  4810 . The nose assembly  4050  also includes a guide  4080  which is similar in structure and function to any of the guides described herein and includes many of the same features. The guide  4080  can include or be joined with an alignment projection  4090 , which can be similar in structure and function to any of the alignment projections described herein. The nose assembly  4050  can include one or more engagement feet  4051  that extend forwardly of the tool. These engagement feet can help establish a predetermined angle between the guide and its respective features, for example, an angled bore  4088 , and a side surface and/or corner of a board as described below. The nose assembly also can have joined with it one or more lateral feet  4052 A and  4052 B which can be used to engage a portion of a board and push it against another board or otherwise stabilize the nose assembly when advancing a fastener into a board with an installation tool. 
     The above respective components of the nose assembly  4050  will now be described in further detail. Beginning with the bracket  4053 , it generally joins the nose assembly  4050  to the feed mechanism  4832  and/or other portion of the installation tool. This bracket, shown in  FIGS. 60, 62 and 64 , can be of an elongated configuration and can actually be a stock portion of a commercially available installation tool, for example, the Grip-Rite® screw gun attachment as described above. The bracket  4053  can define a slot that allows for adjustment for the length of particular fasteners used in conjunction with the nose assembly  4050 . The slot can be demarcated to indicate particular screw lengths and/or drive depths, depending on a particular application. The bracket  4053  can be fastened or otherwise joined with the nose assembly  4050  using fasteners  4053 A. The nose assembly itself can include multiple threaded bores into which the fasteners  4053 A can be threaded to join the nose assembly to the bracket  4053 . Although shown being attached with a bracket, the nose assembly  4050  can be integrally formed with the feed  4832  or other component of the extension or driving tool, depending on the particular application. 
     The nose assembly  4050  also includes a guide  4080 . As mentioned above, this guide can be of any of the guide constructions described herein, and can define a longitudinal angled bore axis  4400  ( FIG. 71 ). This longitudinal angled bore axis  4400  extends along the length of the guide  4080 , generally through the angled bore  4088  defined by the guide and a portion of the alignment projection  4090 . As with the other embodiments herein, the angled bore  4088  can be configured to accommodate and constrain a rotating fastener, and can extend from a first opening  4084  to a second opening  4085 . The first opening  4084  can be configured to receive a fastener, for example, fasteners  10 ,  110 ,  210 ,  310  or any other fastener herein. The second opening  4085  can serve as an exit opening through which the fastener exit the guide and/or alignment projection as it advances and/or work piece. Optionally, the guide  4080  can also be configured to include a material ejection port (not shown) in communication with the angled bore  4088  as described in any of the embodiments above. 
     The angled bore  4088  can be defined within the guide and/or alignment projection so that it is oriented at a non-orthogonal angle, relative to the upper surface and/or side surface of the respective board when the tool is readied for advancing a fastener into that board. The precise angle at which the angled bore  4088  and longitudinal axis  4400  is set can be the same angles as described in connection with other embodiments herein in connection with the angled bore guide and/or longitudinal axis. 
     The guide  4080  can include or otherwise be joined with an alignment projection  4090  extending downwardly from the guide  4080  and/or nose assembly  4050 . The alignment projection  4090 , as shown in  FIGS. 64, 74 and 75 , can generally extend downwardly from the guide and/or nose assembly a preselected distance. For example, the alignment projection  4090  can project about 1/32 inch to about ¾ inch, further optionally about ⅛ inch to about ¼ inch from the bottom  4069  of the nose assembly  4050 . The precise distance which it extends downwardly can vary depending on the particular board with which the tool  4060  is used. For example, when the tool  4060  is used in conjunction with boards that generally abut one another, the preselected distance from which the alignment projection  4090  extends from the outer surface  4069  can be selected so that the projection at least partially fits between opposing corners or surfaces of adjacent boards, for example, within the crevice between those corners, generally above the side surfaces of those boards. 
     Optionally, although not shown, the alignment projection  4090  can optionally extend a distance below the guide  4080  and/or bottom surface  4069 , such that the alignment projection  4090  can function as a spacer to establish a gap between boards positioned adjacent one another. The alignment projection in such a construction can generally extend downwardly from the guide and/or bottom surface about ½ inch to 1 inch in such construction. 
     The alignment projection  4090  can include an inner engagement surface  4092  which is oppositely disposed from an outer engagement surface  4093 . These inner and outer engagement surfaces can merge together at a terminal end  4097 , and form a wedge or generally triangularly shaped projection extending downwardly from the guide. 
     The alignment projection  4090  can be of the shape, construction and can operate similarly to any of the alignment projections of the embodiments described herein. For example, the alignment projection can be in the shape of a triangle, having a generally rounded, downwardly projecting terminal end  4097 . The alignment projection can be in the form of a wedge shape as shown, with each of the respective outer and inner engagement surfaces being planar, curved convexly, curved concavely, rounded, bulged or otherwise formed. As shown in  FIGS. 59 and 64 , the inner engagement surface  4092  can be concavely shaped so the inner engagement surface  4092  can engage a rounded corner  4109  of a board  4102 . The opposing outer engagement surface  4093  can generally be of a planar configuration as shown, but of course, it also can be concavely configured as well, or of any of the other configurations noted herein. 
     The inner engagement surface  4092  can transition to a bottom surface  4069  of the installation tool  4060 , which can form a bottom surface  4069  of the nose assembly  4050 . This bottom surface can also effectively be the bottom surface of the engagement foot  4051 . Like the other embodiments herein, the inner engagement surface can transition to the bottom surface along a radius or fillet, without forming a portion of the bottom surface  4069 . 
     Where the inner engagement surface  4092  and outer engagement surface  4093  transition to one another, a terminal end  4097  of the alignment projection  4090  can be formed. The terminal end, as with the other embodiments herein, can be rounded and/or curved, when viewed from a side view as illustrated so that it is not mar, gouge or otherwise damage the boards which the end contacts. Optionally, the terminal end can include a radius between about 0.1 mm to about 50 mm and further optionally about 1 mm to about 20 mm, and even further optionally about 2 mm to about 10 mm or other radii as desired. Further optionally, the terminal end can include multiple compound radii or angled intersecting portions to provide a rounded construction. 
     As with the other embodiments herein, the precise angle between the inner and outer engagement surface is 4092 and 4093 as well as the angle of the longitudinal axis  4400  relative to one or both of the engagement surfaces can be selected based on the desired location at which the fastener will engage and advance into the corner and/or side surface of the board. The angle between the inner and outer engagement surfaces can vary, optionally from about 10 degrees to about 90 degrees; further optionally about 35 degrees to about 65 degrees; even further optionally about 40 degrees to about 50 degrees or other angles depending on the particular application. These surfaces can be non-parallel with one another if desired. Generally, inner engagement surface  4092  and/or rounded or curved terminal end  4097  can be configured to engage the corner of the board and/or side surface on which the bottom surface  4069  of the nose assembly  4050  and/or engagement foot  4051  rests or is immediately adjacent or near when the tool  4060  is positioned atop of the board for installing the fastener. 
     As shown in  FIGS. 71 and 75 , the inner engagement surface  4092  can be configured to directly engage the upper corner  4109  and/or side surface  4108  of the board  4102 . Generally, the inner engagement surface  4092  can be concavely contoured to engage the corner and/or side surface of the board so as to align the angle bore  4400  with the board side surface at a preselected angle ∀ 6 . This angle ∀ 6  optionally can be about 30 degrees to about 80 degrees; further optionally about 40 degrees to about 70 degrees; and even further optionally about 45 degrees to about 50 degrees or other angles depending on the precise configuration of the corner  4109  and the side surface  4108 . Of course, the inner engagement surface  4092  can be at a particular orientation relative to the bottom surface  4069  to assist in establishing the angle of the bore  4400  relative to the side surface  4108  and/or upper surface  4011  of the board  4102  as well. 
     Referring to  FIGS. 59-64 , the nose assembly  4050  can include an optional engagement foot  4051  which extends forwardly from the nose assembly  4050  and the lateral foot portions  4052 A and  4052 B. This engagement foot  4051  can extend forwardly a preselected distance from the nose assembly. For example, it can extend generally about 2 inches to about 8 inches, 3 inches to about 6 inches and further optionally about 5 inches from the forward portion of the nose assembly  4050 . 
     As shown, the engagement foot  4051  can include two generally parallel bars that extend forwardly from the nose assembly. Although shown as bars, these elements can be combined into a unitary solid, flat structure that extends forwardly from the nose assembly  4050 . The engagement foot  4051  can include a bottom or lower surface  4069 . This surface  4069  as shown is generally planar. The surface  4069  can function to engage the upper surface  4011  of the board  4102 , and provide a stop to forward tilting action of the tool  4060  when being engaged against a board by a user. Generally, the bottom surface  4069  engagement with the board upper surface  4011  also can assist in establishing the angle ∀ 6  ( FIG. 75 ) between the longitudinal axis  4400  and the side surface  4108  of the board  4102 . 
     In operation, the engagement foot  4051  can facilitate the proper alignment of the angled bore  4400  and thus advancement of a fastener into the corner and/or side surface of the board. For example, as shown in  FIGS. 62-64 , when the nose assembly  4050  is initially positioned adjacent the board  4102  and in particular the corner  4109  of the board, the alignment projection  4090  engages the side surface and/or corner of the board. Upon this initial engagement, the laterally extending feet  4052 A,  4052 B, and more particularly, the downwardly extending projections  4054  also may engage the corner  4109  and/or side surface  4108  of the board. The forwardly extending foot  4051 , however, may be tilted upon initial engagement so that the bottom surface  4069  is at an angle ∀ 7  ( FIG. 62 ) relative to the upper surface  4011  of the board  4102 . When disposed at this angle, the longitudinal axis  4400  of the bore is likely offset from the preselected angle ∀ 6  described above. 
     To establish the desired angle ∀ 6 , a user forwardly tilts the tool  4060  which in turn causes the forwardly extending foot  4052  to rotate downwardly in direction R 3  as shown in  FIG. 62 . This downward rotation of the foot  4051  continues until the bottom surface  4069  of the foot engages the upper surface  4011  of the board  4102 . Upon this engagement, the longitudinal axis and bore are generally established at the desired angle ∀ 6  as shown in  FIG. 75 . Generally, the engagement foot assists in consistently and accurately establishing the desired trajectory of the fastener, and more particularly, establishing the desired angle ∀ 6  of the longitudinal axis  4400  relative to the side surface of the board so that the fastener penetrates the board at the desired location and depth, and through the board a sufficient amount. 
     The optional lateral foot or feet  4052 A,  4052 B of the nose assembly  4050  can extend to the left, to the right or to the left and right laterally from the nose assembly  4050  a preselected distance. For example, although shown as extending laterally from opposite sides of the nose assembly  4050 , the laterally extending feet  4052 A,  4052 B can extend from a single side of the nose assembly as desired. The lateral feet, as shown in  FIGS. 63 and 64 , can align with the upper corner  4109  of the board  4102  when the guide  4080 , and more particularly, when the alignment projection  4090  or inner engagement surface  4092  is engaged against the corner  4109  and/or side  4108  of the board  4102 . Generally, the lateral feet  4052 A,  4052 B extend slightly over the upper surface  4011  of the board, but of course, can be reduced in size so that they do not extend over the upper surface  4011 . 
     The lateral feet can include one or more downwardly extending projections  4054  that extend downwardly a preselected distance that is optionally less than or able to the preselected distance which the alignment projection  4090  extends downwardly from the guide  4080  and/or nose assembly  4052 . These downwardly extending projections, although shown as separate and independent elements, can be in the form of a single monolithic structure that extends downwardly from the lateral feet  4052 A,  4052 B. These elements can extend downwardly from the laterally extending foot at a preselected distance away from the alignment projection  4090 . Of course, these downwardly extending projections  4054  can form a portion of the alignment projection and can extend laterally directly from that projection. 
     Optionally, these downwardly extending projections  4054  can, in operation, engage the corner  4109  and/or side surface  4108  of the board. For example, a user can place their foot upon the upper surface of one or both of the feet  4052 A,  4052 B and push against the lateral foot, generally in the direction F 34  shown in  FIG. 63 . With this force, the downwardly extending projections  4054  engage the corner  4109  and/or side  4108  of the board. The force F 34  thus translates to the board  4102 . This can be helpful where the board is bowed and it is desired to use the force F 34  to push the board  4102  in a desired direction to take the bow out of the board and simultaneously fasten the board down to a substructure so that the board remains in its straightened or other configuration. 
     The alignment projection  4090 , and where included the downwardly extending projections  4054  can extend downwardly a preselected distance a sufficient amount to enable a user to engage and push against an outside corner  4109  and/or side surface  4108  of a board with a desired force either to straighten a bow in the board or push the board against yet another board. The alignment projection  4090  and downwardly extending projections  4054  can also be of the above noted preselected distance for the alignment guide, which is small enough so that the alignment projection and/or projections  4054  can fit within the crevice between adjacent corners of boards that are placed immediately adjacent one another; even where the boards are placed so close together that there is no gap established between the respective side surfaces of the adjacent boards. 
     Specifically, as shown in  FIG. 65 , the alignment projection  4090  and downwardly extending projections  4054  associated with the feet  4052 A,  4052 B can be sufficiently small so that they fit between the respective corners  4109 ,  4119  of the boards  4102 ,  4103  respectively. Accordingly, the alignment projection  4090  and the downwardly extending projection  4054  effectively fit within the crevice  4129  defined between the respective corners  4109  and  4119 . The alignment projection and downwardly extending projections as shown, however, do not operate to form or establish a gap between the side surfaces of the respective boards  4102 ,  4103  as described in connection with the embodiments above. 
     With this construction of the alignment projection and the projections where included, the installation tool  4060  can be used to first push a board  4103  against another board  4102 , fasten down an outside, upper corner of  4121  of board  4103  as shown in  FIGS. 65, 66 . In doing so, the user can ensure that the board  4103  is abutted against the other board  4102  with substantially no gap formed therebetween, and only a crevice  4129  between the adjacent upper corners of the boards. After tacking that corner  4121  and its respective side of the board  4103  down to a substrate, the user can then place the tool  4060  with the alignment projection  4090  and optional downwardly extending projections  4054  in the crevice  4129 . The user can then fasten down the opposite side of the board through the corner  4119  to the substrate. This can yield a clean, finished appearance with the fasteners generally hidden from view within the crevices between boards as described in the embodiments above. 
     The other features of the nose assembly  4050  will now be described with further reference to  FIGS. 67-74 . In those figures, the nose assembly  4050  has been removed from the bracket  4053 , and generally the feed  4032 , so that all that is visible is the nose assembly  4050  itself. In addition to the guide  4080  and the alignment projection  4090  described above, the nose assembly  4050  defines a nose assembly opening  4055 . This opening  4055  generally extends from the forward surface or supply side surface  4056 A to an rearward surface or exit side surface  4056 B of the nose assembly. Although referred to as “side surfaces,” the supply side surface or exit side surface can be located on the front and rear, or the opposing lateral sides, of the nose assembly as desired in a particular application. 
     The nose assembly opening  4055  can be of a sufficient size so that the respective fasteners  110  used in conjunction with the installation tool  4060  in general can pass with their full lengths from head to tip through the opening  4055 . The opening  4055  can be configured as a slot that extends generally vertically through the nose assembly  4050 . The slot can generally be aligned parallel to the collated fastener path CFP, for example as shown in  FIGS. 67 and 75 . 
     Optionally, the nose assembly opening  4055  can extend completely through the nose assembly  4050  from the supply side surface  4056 A to the exit side surface  4056 B along the collated fastener path CFP. This can be helpful in some circumstances. For example, if there is a malfunction with the tool  4060 , such as a jam of a fastener from the strip  4907  in the opening  4055  and/or in connection with an advancing or drilling operation, then the collated fasteners  4905  can be pulled in either direction R 4  or R 5  ( FIG. 75 ) along the collated fastener path CFP. This can in some cases provide two effective ways to un-jam or clear a malfunction within the nose assembly  4050  or otherwise in connection with a tool. 
     As shown in  FIG. 75 , it can be seen that the nose assembly opening  4055  can generally be aligned with the longitudinal axis  4400  of the angled bore  4088 . The opening  4055  itself can be substantially larger than the angled bore  4088 . The material of the nose assembly  4050  can form a floor  4055 A of the opening  4055 . The floor  4055 A can extend from the supply side surface  4056 A to the exit side surface  4056 B of the opening  4055 . The floor  4055 A also can form a portion of the guide  4080 , in which case, the floor  4055 A also defines all or a portion of the opening  4084  to the angled bore  4088 . 
     The nose assembly  4050  can include collector guide elements  4081 A,  4081 B as shown in  FIGS. 67-69 . These collector guide elements can generally flank opposing sides of the collated fastener path CFP. Generally the collector guide elements can flare outwardly at their outer most ends distal from the body  4057  of the nose assembly  4050 . For example, as shown in  FIG. 68 , the opposing collector guide elements  4081 A,  4081 B increase in distance from one another distal from the nose assembly opening. As a more particular example, as shown in  FIG. 68 , the distance D 21  near the opening  4055  is less than the distance D 22  near the opening at the free ends of the collector guide elements  4081 A,  4081 B. With this more opened, tapered configuration toward the free ends of the collector guide elements, these elements can more easily collect, trap and guide any stray or oddly oriented fasteners  110  along the strip of material  4907 . In turn, this can more efficiently collect and guide the fasteners  110  toward the opening  4055  for driving through the angled bore into the corner and/or side surface of the board. 
     The collector guide elements  4081 A,  4081 B can also be supplemented with secondary collector guide elements  4082 A,  4082 B. Like the collector guide elements  4081 A and  4081 B, these lower elements can include rounded ends. These ends can further guide and funnel the tips or lower portions of the fasteners  110  which are distal from the strip of material  4907  into the nose assembly opening  4055 . Optionally, although shown as multiple bars, the collector guide elements can be replaced with a slot defined in a larger block or piece of material, for example, like that shown and described in connection with the nose assembly in the ninth alternative embodiment described below. 
     Returning to  FIGS. 68-70 , the collector guide elements  4081 A,  4081 B effectively capture and constrain the fasteners  110 , generally guiding them toward the opening  4055  defined by the nose assembly  4050 . With reference to  FIG. 68 , the collector guide elements  4081 A,  4081 B can be mounted directly to or form an integral part of the nose assembly  4050 . The upper surfaces of the collector guide elements  4081 A,  4081 B can transition to an upper surface of the nose assembly which is adjacent the opening  4055 . This upper surface can form a type of upper guide area or rail  4058  along which the collated fasteners  4905 , and in particular the collated fastener strip of flexible material  4907 , travels. Generally the upper guide area  4058  extends laterally away from the opening  4055 , toward the side surfaces of the nose assembly. 
     The upper guide areas  4058  can generally be of a width sufficient to support the edges  4907 A,  4907 B ( FIG. 68 ) of the strip  4907  as a drive element  4814  engages a fastener  110  ( FIG. 77 ). The upper guide areas  4055  can effectively support those edges so that the strip of material  4907  is not drawn into the opening  4055  of the nose assembly an amount that would cause a jam of the collated fasteners in the nose assembly. Accordingly, that strip of material  4907  is supported sufficiently to allow the fastener  110  to be punched or otherwise removed from the strip of material  4907  by the drive element  4814 . The upper guide area  4058  also can provide sufficient support to allow the drive element  4814  to penetrate or punch through the hole in the strip previously occupied by the fastener  110  during an advancing operation, and optionally, to continue rotating within that hole. 
     Turning now to  FIGS. 72-75 , the nose assembly  4050  can include one or more magnetic elements  4059 , positioned generally in or adjacent the nose assembly opening  4055 . The magnetic element can be located adjacent the collated fastener path CFP as shown in  FIGS. 73, 74, and 75 . The magnetic element can include one or more individual magnets as illustrated in  FIGS. 73 and 75 . Alternatively, the magnetic element  4059  can include a single magnetic magnet, such as a bar magnet, placed longitudinally adjacent the collated fastener path CFP. The magnetic element  4059  is generally placed laterally, in directions L 1  and/or L 2 , of the collated fastener path CFP as shown in  FIG. 73 . 
     The magnetic element  4059  can be in the form of one or more cylindrical magnets that are held in holes defined by the body  4057  of the nose assembly  4050 . Optionally, the magnetic element  4059  can be in the form of a bar that is defined in a simple recess defined by the body. Further optionally, the magnetic element  4059  can be in the form of a magnet, cemented, glued or otherwise fastened to the inside of the opening  4055  adjacent the collated fastener path CFP. 
     The magnetic element  4059  can be virtually any type of magnet. One type of magnet suitable for the nose assembly is a Neodymium magnet. Other magnets capable of attracting items including iron or metal can be used depending on the particular application. 
     As shown in  FIGS. 74 and 75 , the magnetic element  4059  is disposed substantially parallel to the longitudinal axis  4400  of the angled bore  4088 . The magnetic element is placed generally above the angled bore  4088  and substantially aligned in parallel with that bore  4088 . In turn, the magnetic element  4059  can exert a magnetic force or otherwise magnetically engage the fastener  110 , which also is optionally constructed from a magnetic metal, such as an iron containing steel or other metal. The magnetic element  4059 , when so disposed adjacent the collated fastener path CFP, functions to effectively capture the fastener  110  as shown in  FIGS. 73 and 75  and aim it toward the opening  4084  of the angled bore  4088 . Generally, the magnetic element  4059  swings the tip of the fastener away from the other fasteners in the collated fasteners  4907 , and generally away from the magazine or supply container  4840  of the feed  4032 , but generally toward the opening  4084  of the angled bore  4088 . Accordingly, when the fastener  110  is advanced by the drive element  4814 , its tip will point toward, and smoothly and consistently enter, the opening  4084  and thus the angled bore  4088 . It further can travel along the longitudinal axis  4400  into the board. 
     The magnetic element  4059  is well suited for applications where the fasteners  110  are collated and joined with the flexible strip of material  4907 , which may bend or flex in a manner such that the fasteners tend to point in a variety of different directions and can be oddly spaced. For example, in some applications, without the magnetic element adjacent the collated fastener path CFP to engage the respective fastener desired to be advanced into the board, that fastener  110  may be positioned nonparallel to the longitudinal axis  4400  and generally offset from the opening  4084  of the angled bore  4088 . Accordingly, in such a misaligned fastener orientation, if the drive element  4814  engages the fastener and begins to advance it generally toward the guide  4080 , then possible that the fastener will jam against the floor  4055 A of the opening  4055  and possibly exit the opening  4055  either out the forward or rearward surfaces. This would potentially damage the tool and/or the board, or at least possibly jam the tool  4060 . 
     In some cases, however, the magnetic element  4059  can be absent from the nose assembly and tool. For example, where the collated fastener strip of material  4907  has substantially consistent flexibility and structural integrity such that the fasteners  110  are consistently aligned with the opening  4084 , the alignment can be achieved by moving the collated fasteners along the collated fastener path CFP and stopping the strip at a location sufficient to align the fastener  110  with the opening  4084 . Optionally, the alignment can be performed by enlarging the opening  4084 , for example by including a large funnel shaped taper at the opening  4095  sufficient to capture the tip of the fastener  110  to be advanced, so that tip is drawn into the angled bore  4088 . 
     Operation of the eighth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool  4060  will now be described with reference to  FIGS. 71-79 . To begin, the tool  4060  is loaded with collated fasteners  4905 . This can be accomplished by loading the collated fasteners  4905  in the supply holder  4840 . Where the collated fasteners  4905  include a flexible strip of material  4907 , that strip can simply be inserted into a channel or other holding mechanism in the supply holder  4840 . The collated fastener strip  4907  is at least partially placed in the opening  4055  with a portion of the strip supported by the upper guide area  4058  of the nose assembly  4050 . Where included, the collated fasteners and in particular the collated fastener strip  4907  can be registered with the advancing tooth and/or gear  4032 A that moves that collated fasteners in direction R 6  generally toward the nose assembly  4050 . In general, the feed tooth, pusher or gear  4032 A moves or rotates in direction R 8  which in turn moves the collated fasteners  4905  in direction R 6  toward the nose assembly  4050 . 
     After the installation tool  4060  is loaded with collated fasteners  4905 , a user can orient the nose assembly so that the alignment projection  4090  is placed immediately adjacent a corner  4109  of a board  4102 . The board itself  4102  can be resting on a substrate  4106  with the desired intent being to fasten the board securely to the substrate  4106 . Where the installation tool  4060  includes an extension  4820  and a drive tool  4810 , the user can engage the alignment projection  4090  and in particular the inner engagement surface  4092  against the corner  4109  and/or side surface  4108  of the board  4102  while standing. The user can orient the nose assembly  4050  and tool so that the forward engagement foot  4051  appropriately tilts or moves so that its bottom or lower surface  4069  engages the upper surface of the board  4011 . As noted above, this can assist in aligning the longitudinal axis  4400  with a desired trajectory of the fastener, to satisfactorily advance the fastener into the board at a desired angle and at a desired depth up the side surface  4108  and/or corner  4109  of the board as described in the embodiments above. As shown in  FIG. 75 , with the alignment projection in place, the longitudinal axis  4400  of the longitudinal bore  4088  is aligned at preselected angle ∀ 6  relative to the side surface  4108 . As mentioned above, that angle is one which is desired for advancing the fastener into the board at a desired angle and/or depth to securely fasten the board to the substrate  4106 . 
     Optionally, where the nose assembly includes lateral feet  4052 A,  4052 B, the user can engage their own foot against these components to further engage the projection  4054  against the side surface and/or corner to push the board into or against the adjacent board, ensuring a tight fit between those boards, and where desired, eliminating the gap between those adjacent boards. 
     With the alignment projection  4090  satisfactorily placed, and the inner engagement surface  4092  adjacent the corner  4109  and/or side surface  4108 , and thus the second opening  4085  or exit of the angled bore  4088  adjacent the corner and/or side surface, the user can actuate the tool  4060  so that the feed mechanism  4032  further actuates the advancing element  4032 A to move the collated fasteners in direction R 6  along the collated fastener path, generally further into the nose assembly  4050  and more particularly through the nose assembly opening  4055 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 75 , a fastener  110  enters the nose assembly opening  4055 . Upon entering the nose assembly opening  4055 , the fastener is brought near the opening  4084 . Due to the nature of the flexible strip of the collated fasteners, however, the tip of the fastener may be offset and misaligned from the opening  4084 , and therefore not aligned with the angled bore  4088 . To assist in this alignment and ensure that the tip of the fastener  110  is precisely aligned with the opening  4084  of the angled bore  4088 , the magnetic element  4059  exerts a magnetic force on the fastener  110 . Accordingly, the magnetic element  4059  and its force, aligned generally with the longitudinal axis  4400  of the bore  4088 , moves or swings the tip of the fastener so that it is readied for advancement precisely into the opening  4084  and subsequently the angled bore  4088 , along the axis  4400  into the corner or side surface of the board. 
     The drive element  4814  is moved in direction R 9  and engages the head of the fastener  110 . The drive element  4814  may simultaneously, or at a later time during the advancing step, begin rotating. Due to its connection to drive features of the fastener  110 , the fastener  110  also begins to rotate. The drive element  4814  continues to move in direction R 9 , moving the fastener  110  toward the opening  4084  and thus the angled bore  4088 . 
     As shown in  FIGS. 77-79 , the fastener  110  is advanced sufficiently by the drive element  4814  moving in direction R 9 , and also rotating in direction R 10 , such that the drive element  4814  punches through or penetrates the flexible strip  4807 . The drive element  4814  also pushes the fastener through the flexible strip  4907  so that the fastener is no longer held with the other collated fasteners within the strip. The fastener  110  may still be acted upon by the magnetic element  4059  to assist in keeping it aligned with the longitudinal axis  4400  of the bore. 
     As it is rotated, the fastener  110  continues to advance into the opening  4084  of the angled bore  4088 , generally moving toward the second opening or exit  4085  defined by the alignment projection  4090 . In this manner, the fastener moves along longitudinal axis  4400  toward the corner  4109  and/or side surface  4108  of the board  4102  generally at the predetermined angle ∀ 6  relative to the side surface  4108 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 78 , the installation tool  4060 , and in particular the drive element  4814 , continues to rotate in direction R 10  and move in direction R 9 . The fastener  110  also continues to rotate, being guided by the angled bore  4088  into the corner  4109  and/or side surface  4108 . The drive element  4814  continues to penetrate and move through the hole previously occupied by the fastener  110  in the strip of material  4907 . The strip  4907  can be prevented from deforming substantially or moving due to the movement of the drive element  4814  by virtue of the strip  4907  engaging and/or resting upon the upper guide area  4058  of the nose  4050  as described above. 
     The drive element  4814  further advances the fastener  110  into the board  4102  as shown in  FIG. 79 . The drive element  4814  continues to rotate in direction R 10  and move in direction R 9 . In so doing, it continues to move through the opening  4055  of the nose assembly  4050 . The drive element  4814  also passes through the floor  4055 A of the nose opening  4055  into the opening  4084 . The drive element  4814  enters and rotates within the angled bore  4088 . The drive element can also optionally exit the second opening  4085  defined by the alignment projection  4090  and at least partially enter the board  4102 , for example, the corner  4109  and/or side surface  4108  as it rotates the screw  110 . 
     After its advancement by the tool  4060 , the fastener  110  generally extends through the corner  4109  and/or side surface  4108  and through the bottom surface  4117  of the board  4102 . The fastener also enters the substrate  4106  to fasten the board or otherwise tack it or secure it down to the substrate  4106 . 
     With the fastener advancing completed, the installation tool can be operated so that the drive element  4814  retracts from the board  4102 , from the angled bore  4088  and the opening  4055  of the nose assembly  4050 . The drive element can generally assume the same position as illustrated in  FIG. 71 . The alignment projection  4090  and foot  4051  and the tool in general  4060  can be removed from the corner of the board at the location where the fastener was advanced. The user can then move down the corner of the board, laterally along the length of the board and engage the tool  4060  with the corner of the board to advance another fastener at another location. The feed mechanism  4032  can assist in advancing yet another succeeding fastener for advancement in a manner described above. 
     The user can continue to use the board to fasten or tack down the board adjacent the side surface  4108  and/or corner  4109  to the substrate  4106 . When one side of the board adjacent the side surface  4108  is sufficiently tacked down or secured to substrate  4106 , the user can reorient the tool  4060  and place the alignment projection  4090 , and any downwardly extending projections  4054  in the location R 11  ( FIG. 79 ) and advance another fastener or multiple fasteners as shown in broken lines to fasten the board  4102  down along the opposing side  4079  or corner  4119  of the board  4102 . Of course, if the board  4102  is installed adjacent another board  4103  such that the boards are immediately adjacent one another with no gap formed therebetween as shown in  FIG. 79 , then the tool  4060 , and particularly the alignment projection  4090 , is well suited to fit, and optionally wedge, between the adjacent corners of the boards  4102 ,  4103  to advance fasteners through the corner  4119  and/or side surface  4079  of the board  4102  even with the other board  4103  being adjacent or very close to that board  4102 . 
     XIII. Ninth Alternative Tool and Method Embodiment 
     A ninth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool and related method is illustrated in  FIGS. 80-84  and generally designated  5060 . This embodiment, like the embodiments above can be well suited for use with shrinkable boards, or other types of boards as described herein. Moreover, this embodiment is also well suited for the types of fasteners in the embodiments described herein, as well as any other type of fasteners. For example, the tool can be used to advance the side angled fasteners  10 ,  110 ,  210 ,  310  at the respective advancement orientations and using the techniques herein, and/or conventional pointed-tip fasteners. The installation tool of the eleventh alternative embodiment also is similar in construction and operation to the embodiments described above with several exceptions. 
     For example, turning to  FIGS. 80-81 , the ninth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool  5060  generally includes a driving tool  5810 , an extension  5820 , a feed mechanism  5832  and a nose assembly  5050 . The feed mechanism  5832  can include a collated fastener supply holder  5840 . All of these components can be similar in structure and function to that in the eighth alternative embodiment described above. The nose assembly  5050  of this embodiment can be constructed to include a guide  5080  and an alignment projection  5090 . These components can be substantially identical to those of the eighth alternative embodiment described above. Indeed, the components can have the same structure and function as those described above, and will therefore will not be described again here in detail. 
     The nose assembly  5050 , however, can be of a more monolithic integral construction, with the guide  5080 , alignment projection  5090  and collector guide element  5081  formed as an integral, monolithic piece. For example, as shown in  FIGS. 81-84 , the nose assembly  5050  defines a nose assembly opening  5055 . This nose assembly opening  5055  is similar to that described in the embodiment above, and is in communication with an angled bore extending generally from the floor  5055 A of the opening  5055 . Like with the embodiment above, the floor  5055 A of the opening  5055  define the opening  5084  to the angled bore of the guide and alignment projection. The guide  5080  and alignment projection  5090  can be integrally formed with the forward extending engagement foot  5051 . 
     In addition, the nose assembly  50  can further include collector guide element  5081  which is integrally formed generally extends upwardly from the foot  5051 . This collector guide element  5081  can include opposing collector guide element sides  5081 A and  5081 B that generally flank the opposing sides of the collated fastener path CFP. The collated fastener path CFP can generally be aligned with and run through the longitudinal axis  5400  of the angled bore as with the other embodiments herein. 
     The collector guide element  5081  can generally be configured such that the opposing collector guide element sides  5081 A,  5081 B toward the end distal from the nose assembly opening  5055  open or otherwise include outwardly opening tapered sides  5081 C. These outwardly opening sides  5081 C can generally form a continuous wall that functions to funnel the fasteners  110  toward the nose assembly opening  5055  and generally align the fasteners with the longitudinal axis  5400 . 
     As illustrated in  FIGS. 83-84 , the collector guide  5081  element can be in the form of an elongated slot  5081 D that merges or transitions to the opening  5055  of the nose assembly. Indeed, both the opening  5055  and the slot  5081 D can be part of a continuous slot extending through a monolithic block that forms the nose assembly  5050 . 
     Although not shown, the nose assembly  5050  of the ninth alternative embodiment can include one or more magnetic elements. These magnetic elements can be positioned generally in alignment with the longitudinal axis  5400  of the angled bore and can to align the fasteners  110  with the opening  5084  of the nose assembly  5050 . The operation of the installation tool  5060  of this ninth alternative embodiment is similar to that described above in connection with the eighth alternative embodiment, and accordingly, will not be described again here. 
     XIV. Tenth Alternative Tool and Method Embodiment 
     A tenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool and related method is illustrated in  FIGS. 85-89  and generally designated  6060 . This embodiment, like the embodiments above can be well suited for use with shrinkable boards, or other types of boards as described herein. Moreover, this embodiment is also well suited for the types of fasteners in the embodiments described herein, as well as any other type of fasteners. For example, the tool can be used to advance the side angled fasteners  10 ,  110 ,  210 ,  310  at the respective advancement orientations and using the techniques herein, and/or conventional pointed-tip fasteners. The installation tool of the tenth alternative embodiment also is similar in construction and operation to the embodiments described above with several exceptions. 
     As shown in  FIG. 85 , the tenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool  6060  generally includes a driving tool  6810 , but not extension, and a feed mechanism  6832  which feeds the collated fasteners  4905  to the nose assembly  6050 . These components can be similar in structure and operation to those of the eighth and ninth alternative embodiments described above, or any other embodiments as desired. The nose assembly  6050  of this construction, however, is slightly different in a few aspects. For example, the nose assembly  6050  can include an integrally formed guide  6080 , alignment projection  6090  and engagement foot  6051 . The guide is similar in construction and function to that of the embodiments above and has an angled bore  6088  that includes a first opening (not shown) in communication with the nose assembly opening  6055 . The guide also can be joined with or include the alignment projection  6090 , which can include an inner engagement surface  6092  and outer engagement surface  6093 . The inner engagement surface  6092  can define the exit or second opening  6085  of the angled bore  6088 . These features again are similar to those in the embodiments described above and will not be described again here in detail. 
     The foot  6051  can include a bottom surface  6069  configured to engage an upper surface of a board which is to be fastened with a tool  6060 . Like the other embodiments above, the engagement foot  6051  can assist in aligning the longitudinal axis  6400  of the angled bore  6088  with a side surface or corner of a board. For example, as shown in  FIG. 88 , the engagement foot  6051  can engage the upper surface  6111  of the board  6102  with the lower surface  6069  of the foot  6051 . The alignment projection  6090  can also engage the corner  6109  of the board. With these portions of the nose assembly  6050  engaging the board  6102 , the longitudinal axis  6400  of the angled bore can be aligned to provide a desired trajectory of the fastener, for example, at an angle relative to the side surface of the board like the predetermined angles in the eighth and ninth alternative embodiments, or other embodiments, above. 
     Returning to  FIGS. 86, 87, and 89 , the nose assembly  6050  can define the nose assembly opening  6055 . This nose assembly opening can differ from the other embodiments in that it is a “dead end” opening. For example, as shown in  FIG. 85 , the opening  6085  can be configured so that the collated fastener path CFP is aligned with it. Moreover, it can be generally aligned with the longitudinal axis of the angled bore  6088 . The opening  6055 , however, can be bordered by a stop or a back wall  6052 . This back or stop wall can generally be aligned with the angled bore  6088 . The fasteners  110  advanced into the opening thus cannot pass beyond the back wall  6052 . 
     Optionally, the back wall  6052  can include a magnetic element  6059  to generally align the fastener  110  with the angled bore  6088  and more generally the opening  6084  to the angled bore as with the other embodiments above. In this embodiment, however, the magnetic elements  6059  are positioned along and/or within the collated fastener path CFP, and can generally obstruct a portion of the collator fastener path CFP. The nose assembly  6055  can be outfitted with or define a strip aperture by which the strip of material  4907  can advance through the remainder of the nose assembly  6050 . The operation and function of the installation tool  6060  of this embodiment is similar to that of the eighth and ninth embodiments above and will not be described again in detail here. 
     XV. Eleventh Alternative Tool and Method Embodiment 
     An eleventh alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool and related method is illustrated in  FIGS. 90-95  and generally designated  7060 . This embodiment, like the embodiments above can be well suited for use with shrinkable boards, or other types of boards as described herein. Moreover, this embodiment is also well suited for the types of fasteners in the embodiments described herein, as well as any other type of fasteners. For example, the tool can be used to advance the side angled fasteners  10 ,  110 ,  210 ,  310  at the respective advancement orientations and using the techniques herein, and/or conventional pointed-tip fasteners. The installation tool of the eleventh alternative embodiment also is similar in construction and operation to the embodiments described above with several exceptions. 
     For example, the eleventh alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool can be a simplified tool for use in advancing individual fasteners, one at a time, into the side surface and/or corner of a board as described in conjunction with the embodiments of the other fasteners and tools noted herein. As shown in  FIGS. 90-91 , the tool generally includes an elongated shaft  7062 . This elongated shaft can define a shaft bore  7063 . The shaft bore can generally be configured to receive a drive element that is rotated by a drive tool as described in further detail below. 
     The shaft bore  7063  can be generally an extension of the angled bore  7088 . This angle bore  7088  can be similar in structure and function to the angled bore of the embodiments described in the tools above. Generally, the elongated shaft bore  7063  and angled bore  7088  can form a continuous bore through the elongated shaft and the guide  7080 , as well as the alignment projection  7090 . The continuous bore can be of a sufficient internal continuity so that a fastener inserted in one end of the bore can be advanced through the bore and exit the opposite end of the bore. 
     The elongated shaft  7062  of the tool  7060  can be joined with the guide  7080 . This guide can generally have a guide body  7081 . The guide body  7081  can include and/or be joined with an alignment projection  7090 . For example, the guide body and alignment projection can be an integral monolithic part, or they can be joined to one another with fasteners or as welded parts. 
     The guide body  7081 , and more generally the guide  7080  can include a forward bottom surface  7069  and optionally a rearward bottom surface  7068  as shown in  FIGS. 90 and 91 . Each of the bottom surfaces as shown are generally planar, however, if desired, these surfaces can be contoured or can include ridges or other surface features to enhance contact and placement of the guide and tool against an upper surface of a board. Generally, however, the planar configuration of the bottom surfaces  7068  and  7069  are sufficient to engage an upper surface of a board into which a fastener is advanced as further described below. 
     Although shown as a semi-circular surface which extends generally from the alignment projection forward and rearward, the bottom surfaces  7069  and  7068  respectively, can be of any geometric configuration. For example, these surfaces can be oval, square, rectangular, triangular, polygonal or of other shapes. The precise geometric configuration can be selected depending on the particular application. 
     Returning to  FIG. 91 , the tool  7060  includes an alignment projection  7090  that extends downwardly from the guide  7080  a preselected distance. This preselected distance can be about 1/32 inch to about ½ inch, further optionally about ⅛ inch to about ¼ inch from the bottom  7069  of the tool  7060 . The precise distance that the alignment projection extends can vary depending on the particular boards with which the tool  7060  is used. For example, where the tool is used to secure a corner or side of a board that is immediately adjacent another board, the preselected distance can be selected so that the projection can at least partially fit between the opposing corners  7109 ,  7119  of the adjacent boards  7102 ,  7103  ( FIGS. 92-93 ), without extending between or promoting the formation of a gap between the boards if the same is desired. Optionally, the alignment projection can fit within the space or crevice between the corners  7109 ,  7119 , above the side surfaces of the boards which side surfaces are located vertically below the corners of those boards. 
     Of course, where a gap between adjacent boards  7102 ,  7103  is desired, the alignment projection  7090  can extend downwardly a preselected distance that actually forms a gap between the respective boards (not shown), and in particular, the side surfaces of those boards which face one another when the boards are laid side by side. In such a case, the alignment projection can also act as a spacer, and can be dimensioned to have a thickness to establish a predetermined gap of any desired distance between the respective boards. The spacers and their functions are explained in the embodiments above, which can likewise be implemented in connection with the alignment projection if desired. 
     Returning to the embodiment illustrated in  FIG. 91 , the alignment projection  7090  can be in the shape of a triangle, generally in a wedge shape when viewed from the side. For this reason, the alignment projection can also be referred to as a wedge. The alignment projection  2090  can include a terminal end  7097  at which the inner and outer engagement surfaces  7092 ,  7093  can merge with one another. Generally, the terminal end can be rounded or angled, and can include the radius similar to the terminal end of the alignment projection in any of the embodiments above. For example, the terminal end can be rounded and/or curved when viewed from a side view as illustrated so that it does not mar or gouge boards which it contacts. Optionally, the terminal end can include multiple compound radii or angled intersecting portions to provide the rounded effect. 
     The features of the alignment projection, in particular the inner engagement surface, the outer engagement surface and the terminal end can have the structure and function of those same components in any of the embodiments above. Further, with regard to the angle between the inner and outer engagement surfaces, as well as the angle of the longitudinal axis  7400  relative to the engagement surfaces, can be preselected based on the desired location at which a fastener will engage and advance into the corner and/or side surface of the board. For example, the angle between the inner and outer engagement surfaces  7092 ,  7093  taken from the terminal end, can vary from about 10° to about 90°, optionally about 35° to about 65°, further optionally about 40° to about 50°, or in other ranges depending on the particular application. Generally, these surfaces can be non-parallel with one another if desired. 
     As illustrated in  FIG. 91 , the inner engagement surface  7092  can be at an angle α 7  relative to the bottom surface  7069 . This angle α 7  can be about 70° to about 140°, optionally about 80° to about 110°, further optionally about 90° to about 100°. Further, as with the inner engagement surfaces of the other embodiments herein, that inner engagement surface can be configured to directly engage the upper corner  7109  and/or side surface below the corner of the board. For example, the inner engagement surface can be rounded, concave or planar to easily engage and rest against the corner. 
     As illustrated in  FIG. 91 , the inner engagement surface  7092  defines the exit opening  7085  through which the fastener exits the angled bore  7088  and optionally enters a corner or side surface of a board. Although referred to as an exit opening, due to the configuration of the tool, the opening  7085  can also function as an entrance opening to the angled bore  7088 . For example, a fastener can be loaded into the angled bore  7088  by inserting it head first into the opening  7085  and moving it up into the angled bore and the elongated shaft bore  7063 . As further described below, the drive element  7814  can engage the head and push and advance and rotate the fastener back out through the opening  7085 , at which point that opening functions as an exit opening. 
     Turning now to the outer engagement surface  2093  of the alignment projection, that surface can be at an angle α 8  relative to the bottom surface  7063 , as shown in  FIG. 90 . This angle α 8  can be about 30° to about 80°, optionally about 40° to about 60°, and further optionally about 45° to about 55°. The precise angle can be selected depending on the angle at which the longitudinal axis  7400  and thus the trajectory of the fastener is desired to be oriented relative to the side surface of the board into which the fastener is driven. 
     As shown in  FIG. 90 , the tool  7060  can include a magnetic element  7083  that exerts a magnetic force on a fastener placed in the angled bore  7088  and/or shaft bore  7063 . The magnetic element can be joined with the shaft  7064 , guide  7080 , alignment projection  7090 , or other element of the tool. Alternatively, the magnetic element can be associated with a bit of a driving tool  7820  use to drive the fastener. Generally, the magnet functions to hold and retain a fastener in the angled bore  7088  and/or shaft bore  7063 , readied for a new advancing operation. 
     With reference to  FIGS. 92-95 , the operation of the tool  7060  in conjunction with advancing a fastener will now be described. To begin, a user places a fastener head first into the exit opening  7085 , pushing the fastener sufficiently into to the angled bore  7088  so that the fastener is loaded in that bore, and optionally the shaft bore, with its tip or chisel edge facing toward the opening  7085 . Where the elongated shaft, guide or tool optionally includes a magnetic element  7083 , that element exerts a magnetic force on the fastener to retain the fastener in the bore. 
     With the fastener loaded in the angled bore  7088  and/or shaft bore  7063 , the tool  7060  is placed adjacent a board  7102  to be fastened with a fastener. In particular, the bottom surface  7069  is placed adjacent the upper surface  7111  of the board  7102 . The bottom surface  7069  can engage the upper surface  7111  of the board  7102  to establish a predetermined angle at which the longitudinal axis  7400  is placed, which in turn can establish the desired trajectory of the fastener as described in the embodiments above. Further, the alignment projection  7090  is placed so that the inner engagement surface  7092  engages or is at least placed adjacent the corner  7109  and/or side surface of the board  7102 . 
     Optionally, as shown in  FIGS. 93-95 , another board  7103  can be placed immediately adjacent the board  7102  into which the fastener is to be advanced with the tool  7060 . In this arrangement, the outer engagement surface  7093  can also engage the other corner  7119  of the other board  7103 . Where included, the rearward bottom surface  7068  can also engage the upper surface  7111 A of the other board  7103 . Generally, this can provide further stabilization to the tool and assist in holding the elongated shaft  7062 , preventing the tool from rotating. 
     To advance the fastener into the corner  7109  and/or side surface of the board  7102 , the drive element  7814  is placed in the shaft bore  7162  of the installation tool  7010 . As with the other embodiments herein, the drive element can have a drive feature corresponding to and engaging a feature of the head of the fastener. The drive element  7814  can be rotated with the driving tool  7820 , which in turn rotates the fastener. The user applies a force F 36  to the driving tool  7820  while rotating the drive element  7814 . This in turn advances the fastener  110  through the angled bore out the exit opening  7085  of the alignment projection  7090 . The fastener then continues into the corner  7109  and/or side surface of the board until it is fully advanced in the board. 
     During the advancing of the fastener, the longitudinal axis  7400  of the bore  7088  is aligned so that the fastener  110  advances along a trajectory that is generally at an angle α 9  relative to the side surface  7108  of the board  7102 . This angle α 9  can be about 30° to about 80°, optionally about 40° to about 70°, and further optionally about 45° to 55° or other angles depending upon the precise configuration of the corner  7109  and the side surface  7108 . Generally, in the configuration shown in  FIG. 92A , the outer engagement surface  2093  is outwardly disposed relative to the side surface  7108 , and can engage and/or be placed adjacent the corner  7119  of an adjacent board  7103  as described in connection with the other embodiments herein to provide a sort of wedging effect. Of course, where there is no other board  7103  placed adjacent the board  7102 , the outer engagement surface  7093  would not engage any other boards during the advancing operation. 
     As the fastener advances, the drive element  7814  advances further into the shaft bore  7063 . During this advancement, and to facilitate this advancement of the fastener, the force F 36  can be applied to the driving tool  7820 . 
     Generally, as the driving tool  7820  rotates the drive element  7814  to advance the fastener, there can be slight torque exerted on the installation tool  7060 . This torque can be resisted or countered by the interaction of the alignment projection  7090  with the corner  7109  and/or the bottom surface  7069  with the upper surface of the board  7111 . A user also can grasp the elongated shaft or other portion of the installation tool  7060  to counter this torque. The torque can be countered to prevent the tool  7060  from disengaging the board, which disengagement could prevent the fastener from being advanced at a predetermined angle relative to the side surface of the board. Optionally, the elongated shaft and/or some other portion of the tool  7060  can be outfitted with a small handle or grip to more easily and ergonomically grasp it to further counter torque. 
     Advancement of the fastener  110  into the board  7102  can be terminated by the interaction of a stop  7116  with an end  7064  of the elongated shaft  7062 . When the stop  7116  bottoms out against the elongated shaft  7062 , this can provide tactile feedback to the user that the fastener is fully installed, that it is time to remove the tool  7060  from the board, disengaging the alignment projection from the corner and moving on to reload another fastener in the tool. The use of the tool and advancing operation can be repeated multiple times to fasten down the board to the substrate. 
     XVI. Twelfth Alternative Tool and Method Embodiment 
     A twelfth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool and related method is illustrated in  FIGS. 96-97  and generally designated  8060 . This embodiment, like the embodiments above, can be well suited for use with shrinkable boards, or other types of boards as described herein. Moreover, this embodiment is also well suited for the types of fasteners in the embodiments described herein, as well as any other type of fasteners. For example, the tool can be used to advance the side angled fasteners  10 ,  110 ,  210 ,  310  at the respective advancement orientations and using the techniques herein, and/or conventional pointed-tip fasteners. The installation tool of the twelfth alternative embodiment also is similar in construction and operation to the embodiments described above with several exceptions. 
     For example, the twelfth alternative embodiment of the installation tool  8060  incorporates the elongated shaft  8062 , guide  8080 , alignment projection  8090  and other features of the eleventh alternative embodiment of the installation tool  7060  described above. In addition, however, the tool can include a drive element  8814  which is reciprocally joined with the elongated shaft, guide and alignment projection so that the tool automatically resets to a ready for fastener loading mode after a fastener advancing operation is completed. 
     As shown in  FIG. 96 , the tool includes a sleeve  8816  joined with the drive element  8814  and moveably coupled to the elongated shaft  8062 . A bias member  8818  is interposed between the end  8064  of the elongated shaft  8062  and an interior surface  8819  of the sleeve  8816 . Generally, the bias member  8818  urges the sleeve  8816  and elongated shaft  8062  away from one another, which in turn can retract the drive element  8814  a sufficient distance up into the elongated bore  8063  of the elongated shaft  8062  so that a fastener  110  can be positioned in the angled bore  8088  and/or elongated bore  8063 . Optionally, this can reset the tool, readying it to be loaded with another fastener. 
     To restrict movement of the sleeve  8816  and shaft  8062  or guide  8080  relative to one another, the elongated shaft  8062  can include a shoulder  8065  which can extend generally annularly from the shaft. This shoulder  8065  can engage a portion of the sleeve  8816 , for example a projection or ring  8817  that is located on the interior of the sleeve  8816 . As shown in  FIG. 96 , the bias member  8818  urges the sleeve  8816  and the end  8815  of the drive element  8814  away from the end  8064  of the elongated shaft  8062 . The projection  8817  of the sleeve abuts against the shoulder  8065  and thereby prevents the sleeve  8818  from being entirely disengaged from the shaft  8062 . Of course, a variety of other constructions, such as pins in slots, set screws, and cam configurations alternatively be used to prevent separation of the sleeve from the shaft as desired, while still implementing a biasing member to automatically reset the tool for a fastener reload. 
     The bias member  8818  generally engages a portion of the sleeve, for example, an interior surface  8819  of the sleeve and an end of  8064  of the shaft  8062 . Of course, the bias member could be interposed between different components of the drive element  8814  and the elongated shaft. Further, although shown as a coil spring, the bias member could be in the form of an elastomeric element, a leaf spring, or some other biasing element configured to retract the drive element  8814  into the bore  8063  or generally away from the opening  8085  of the tool  8060 . 
       FIG. 97  illustrates the installation tool  8060  in its compressed state. Generally, in operation, a user exerts a force F 37  on the end  8815  of the tool, which in turn moves the driving element  8814  through the elongated bore  3063  and the angled bore  8088 , eventually causing the associated fastener  110  to exit from the exit opening  8085  of the tool in into a board (not shown). Generally, the bias member  8818  compresses during the application of the force F 37 . The sleeve and elongated shaft can be configured so that the sleeve bottoms out against the end  8064  of the elongated shaft  8062  to cease advancement of the drive element in the angled bore or significantly beyond the opening  8085 . When the force F 37  is removed, the bias element  8018  again urges the surface  8819  of the sleeve away from the end  8064  of the shaft  8062  to re-attain the configuration shown in  FIG. 96 . At that point, another fastener can be loaded through the opening  8085  and into the angled bore  8088  and/or elongated bore  8063 . The process for using the installation tool  8060  can then be repeated to install additional fasteners in the board. 
     XVII. Thirteenth Alternative Tool and Method Embodiment 
     A thirteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool and related method is illustrated in  FIGS. 98-106  and generally designated  9060 . This embodiment, like the embodiments above can be well suited for use with shrinkable boards, or other types of boards as described herein. Moreover, this embodiment is well suited for the types of fasteners in the embodiments described herein, as well as any other type of fasteners. For example, the tool can be used to advance the side angled fasteners  10 ,  110 ,  210 ,  310  at the respective advancement orientations and using the techniques herein, and/or conventional pointed-tip fasteners. The installation tool of the thirteenth alternative embodiment also is similar in construction and operation to the embodiments described above with several exceptions. 
     For example, turning to  FIGS. 90-102 , the thirteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener tool  9060  generally includes a feed mechanism  9832  and a nose assembly  9050 . A driving element  9814  can be coupled to a driving tool (not shown). All of these components can be similar in structure and function to that in the alternative embodiments above, for example, at least the eighth through twelfth embodiments above. 
     The nose assembly  9050  of the thirteenth embodiment can be constructed to include a guide  9080  and an alignment projection  9090 . These components can be substantially identical to those of the above embodiments, for example the eighth through twelfth embodiments above. Indeed, the components can have the same structure and function as those described above and will therefore not be described here again in detail. Suffice it to say that the guide  9080  can define an angled bore  9088  that includes a first opening  9084  in communication with the nose assembly opening  9055 . The guide  9080  can also be joined with and/or include the alignment projection  9090 , which can include the inner engagement surface  9092  and an outer engagement surface  9093 , and can define at least a portion of the angled bore. The inner engagement surface can define the exit or second opening  9085  of the angled bore  9088 , which extends along a longitudinal axis  9400 . These features again are similar to those in the embodiments described above and elsewhere herein. 
     As shown in  FIGS. 98-101 , the nose assembly  9050  can further define a nose assembly opening  9055  that opens completely to the environment on one side of the nose assembly as shown in  FIG. 98 . The nose assembly opening  9055  can be in the form of a recess that is disposed adjacent a nose assembly leg  9056  that extends from adjacent the feed  9832  to the guide  9080  and/or foot  9051 . With the generally open sided design of the nose assembly opening  9055 , an operator can see any issues with the fasteners being advanced through the nose assembly and can access the fasteners or jam if desired. The open configuration of the nose assembly opening also provides an open channel for chip and dust to escape as material is bored or removed from a board and exits the opening  9084  of the angled bore  9088 . 
     The nose assembly leg  9056  can include a supply side surface  9056 A and an opposing exit side surface  9056 B which generally correspond to the supply side and exit side surfaces of the nose assembly in other embodiments herein. The leg  9056  forms a sidewall of the nose assembly opening  9055 . The nose assembly opening is  9055  is bounded on its lower portion by a floor  9055 A of the nose assembly. 
     The nose assembly, and more particularly the nose assembly leg  9056  can define a guide pocket  9069 . The guide pocket  9069  can be defined on the inner surface of the leg facing the opening  9055 . The guide pocket can be aligned with the angled bore  9088  and more particularly the opening  9084  of the angled bore. Moreover, the guide pocket  9069  is aligned with and lies along the angled bore longitudinal axis  9400  so that a fastener rotating within the guide pocket  9069  eventually enters the opening  9084 , and travels along the longitudinal axis  9400  as shown in  FIGS. 99 and 104 . 
     The guide pocket can generally be in the form of a semicircular pocket or recess that opens to the inner surface of the nose assembly leg  9056  as shown in  FIG. 104 . When in a semicircular form, the pocket can have a radius R 12  that is generally greater than the radius R 13  of the head of the fasteners which are advanced by the installation tool  9060 . As an example, the pocket radius R 12  can be about 0.125 inches and the fastener head can have a radius of about 0.1 or 0.08 inches, both being less than the radius R 12  of the pocket. In this manner, the head can rotate in direction R 14  within the pocket, generally closely fitting within the pocket and being somewhat constrained in it. 
     Although shown as a semicircular pocket, as shown in broken lines in  FIG. 104 , the pocket can be of a rectangular shaped groove or slot that extends along the leg  9056  of the nose assembly  9050 . Further, if desired, the pocket can be of another shape, such as a polygonal, triangular or elliptical, depending on the particular application. 
     Generally, the pocket  9069  can be dimensioned so that the fastener  110 A, when fitted and rotating in direction R 14  within the pocket and/or angled bore  9088 , is constrained within that pocket so that the fastener continues to advance parallel to and along the longitudinal axis  9400  of the angled bore  9088 . This can be helpful, particularly where the fastener enters the side of a board and begins to dive or deflect substantially off the longitudinal axis in a board, due to the grain of the board, the density of the board, or the angle of entry into the corner or surface of the board. In such a case, the head  110 H rotating in direction R 14  within the pocket  9069  maintains its position against the sidewalls of the pocket. In turn, the guide pocket  9069  forces the head to advance generally linearly along the pocket so that, despite the forces exerted by the board on the fastener, the fastener remains aligned with and advances along the longitudinal axis  9400  along a desired trajectory. 
     As shown in  FIGS. 98, 99 and 100 , the screw  110 A, the nose assembly  9050  can include one or more magnetic elements  9059 . These magnetic elements  9059  can be associated with the guide pocket  9050 . For example, the magnetic elements can be disposed generally in the lower or side portions of the guide pocket  9069 . The magnetic elements can exert a magnetic force on the fastener as described in connection with the magnetic elements of the other embodiments above. Accordingly, as rotates, the fastener  110 A is constrained and optionally held within the pocket by the magnetic forces. The magnetic elements can exert a magnetic force on the fastener as it is rotated in the direction R 14  throughout the stroke of the tool. The magnetic force can be exerted both on the shaft and the head of the fastener during advancement thereof. Generally, the magnetic elements can cease exerting a magnetic force on the fastener after the head of the fastener enters the opening  9084  of the angled bore  9088 , where the screw is entirely circumferentiated by the angled bore  9088 . In this position, the head is being substantially guided by the angled bore. 
     As noted above and shown in  FIGS. 98 and 104 , the guide pocket is aligned with the longitudinal axis  9400  of the angled bore  9088 . The guide pocket  9069  can form a partial continuation of the angled bore  9088 , with the opening  9084  being disposed generally between the guide pocket  9069  and the angled bore  9088 . In general, the guide pocket can form a channel that partially circumferentiates or surrounds the fastener and its components as that fastener rotates. For example, the channel can surround about 190° to about 60° of the respective components of the fastener  110 A. 
     The angled bore  9088 , however, can surround or circumferentiate more of the fastener and its components than the guide pocket. For example, the angled bore as well as its opening can circumferentiate or surround the fastener  110 A and its components 360°. Generally, the angled bore can substantially entirely surround the fastener and its components as the fastener is advanced and rotated therethrough. 
     The guide pocket  9069  can transition to the angled bore  9088  at the opening  9084  as described above. That transition can also form a transition between the leg  9056  to the guide  9080  of the nose assembly  9050 . Generally, the guide  9080  or opening  9055  can include a floor  9055 A, which defines the opening  9084  to the angled bore  9088 . The opening  9084  can also circumferentiate or surround the entire screw, 360° around the screw if desired. 
     Optionally, the guide pocket  9069  can form a C-shaped channel that transitions to a circular angled bore  9088  defined by the guide  9080  or alignment projection  9090 . When in this C-shaped or channeled configuration, the pocket  9069  can generally be of a semicircular, square, rectangular or other polygonal shape. In general, the pocket can form a portion of the corresponding cross sectional shape of the angled bore, which also can be circular, rectangular, square, polygonal or some other shape. 
     Further optionally, as shown in  FIG. 102 , the depth of the pocket PD can be a fraction or a portion of the angled bore dimension ABD. For example, the pocket depth can be of a depth equal to the radius of the angled bore dimension ABD, which can be a diameter if the angled bore is circular. The pocket can also be “open” on one side, generally opening into the opening  9055 , so that a fastener within the opening  9055  can snap laterally into the pocket guide  9069 , coming in from the side after having passed around a diverter element and/or a portion of the leg  9056 . Further, when disposed in the pocket  9069 , the fastener can be located or positioned partially within the nose assembly opening  9055  and partially in the pocket  9069 . In this position, the fastener has a portion of its cross section in the pocket and another in the nose assembly opening. As the fastener advances, it also can be position partially in the pocket, partially in the opening of the nose assembly, and partially in the angled bore. 
     The orientation of the guide pocket  9069  within the nose assembly  9050  and relative to the feed line of the collated fasteners, or collated fastener path CFP, is such that the guide pocket is generally transversely oriented to the feed line or collated fastener path CFP. For example, as shown in  FIGS. 103A and 104 , the guide pocket  9069  can be in an exemplary “C” or “U” shaped channel configuration having an outer facing opening  9069 A. The channel and the opening open in the direction and along the guide pocket opening plane OP, which bisects the opening  9069 A of the pocket. The opening is oriented so that it opens laterally, or generally transversely relative to the collated fastener path. For example, an opening plane OP of the guide pocket  9069 , is oriented so that that plane OP is transverse to the collated fastener path CFP. As illustrated in  FIG. 103A , the opening plane OP can be disposed perpendicular to the feed line or collated fastener path CFP. Of course, in some applications, the opening plane could be oriented so that the opening  9069 A opens with the opening plane OP oriented at some other angle, for example, 30 degrees, 45 degrees, or 60 degrees relative to the feed line or collated fastener path CFP. In general, the opening plane OP of the guide pocket  9069  is non-parallel to the feed line or collated fastener path CFP, and can open laterally toward or away from that path CFP at some desired orientation. 
     With the guide pocket  9069  of the nose assembly  9050 , a variety of different length of fasteners can be installed with the tool  9060 . For example, due to the physical configuration of the pocket and the optional magnets, fasteners positively register within the pocket regardless of their length. These fasteners are able to be advanced consistently and accurately toward the opening  9084 , again, regardless of their length. With such a construction, the nose assembly and the length of the leg need not be adjustable to accommodate different length fasteners. Of course, if desired, it can be adjustable depending on the particular screw application. 
     As shown in  FIGS. 98, 101 and 102 , the nose assembly  9050  can include a wing element  9087  including a collector guide element  9081 , a diverter element  9082 , and a guide area or surface  9058 . The collector guide element  9081  can channel the individual fasteners  110 A,  1108 ,  110 C,  110 D along the collated fastener path CFP, generally capturing the individual fasteners so that they appropriately engage the nose assembly  9050  and travel in a desired direction. The collector guide element  9081  can provide a ramp to guide individual fasteners. For example, If a fastener is excessively tilted, the collector guide element  9081  can guide it toward the drive element  9814 . The collector guide element  9081  can be in the form of a chamfered or rounded surface that is positioned immediately adjacent and partially within or obstructing the collated fastener path CFP. This collector guide element can transition to or include a diverter element  9082 . 
     Optionally, although shown as adjoined, chamfered or angled surfaces, the collector guide element  9081  and the diverter element  9082  can be formed by multiple compound angled surfaces or multiple compound curved surfaces. As one example, the diverter element and collector guide element could be combined to form a rounded, hemispherical element extending along and obstructing a portion of the collated fastener path CFP. 
     As illustrated, the diverter element  9082  is a secondary camphered or rounded surface that is joined with the collector guide element  9081 . The diverter element can be positioned directly within and can obstruct at least a portion of the collated fastener path CFP. The diverter element  9082  can be configured so that after an individual fastener is directed toward it via the collector guide element  9081 , the diverter element engages that fastener. More particularly, as the fastener advances toward the guide pocket, the diverter element  9082  can engage an upper portion or some other portion of the fastener near the head of the fastener or along the shaft. During such engagement, the diverter element  9082  swings or moves the tip of the fastener outwardly, generally off of the collated fastener path CFP until the fastener is advanced adjacent the pocket  9069 , at which point or earlier, the diverter element  9082  disengages or otherwise is no longer in contact with the fastener and the fastener drops or moves into the pocket  9069 . 
     Optionally, due to the flexible nature of the strip  9907  of the collated fasteners  9905 , and/or the nature of the connection between the strip and a head of an individual fastener, the swinging, tilting or otherwise moving of the tip of a fastener with the diverter element  9082  is possible. For example, the head and upper portion of the fastener bends or flexes the flexible strip  9907  as the diverter element  9082  engages another portion of the fastener. Sometimes, when it returns to its un-flexed state, the flexible strip  9907  can aid in swinging, tilting or moving the fastener or its tip into the guide pocket, generally in line with the trajectory of the collated fastener path CFP. 
     To describe the movement of the fastener by the diverter element  9082  in more detail, reference is made to  FIG. 100 . There, the diverter element  9082  transitions the fasteners, for example  110 B, so that the tip  110 T is displaced from the collated fastener path CFP by a tip offset distance TOD. When the diverging element  9082  displaces the tip  110 T off of the collated fastener path CFP, the tip  110 T instead moves along a collated fastener tip path CFTP which is offset from the collated fastener path CFP. Because the collated fastener path CFP also passes through the longitudinal axis  9400 , the tip also moves a tip offset distance TOD, offset from the plane of the longitudinal axis  9400  coming out of the page in  FIG. 100 . 
     Due to the configuration and location of the guide pocket  9069 , a portion of the leg  9056  obstructs the collated fastener path CFP. The diverter element  9082  assists in allowing the fasteners and their tips to ride outward and around that portion of the leg  9056  or the nose assembly that obstructs the collated fastener path CFP until the respective individual fasteners engage or are readied for positioning within the guide pocket  9069 . 
     As shown in  FIGS. 98 and 101 , the wing element  9087  can include a guide surface or area  9058 . The guide surface  9058  can be located adjacent and optionally can transition to the diverter element  9082 . The guide surface  9058  can form a riding surface upon which a portion of the strip  9907  can travel as the collated fasteners are advanced through the nose assembly. For example during an advancing operation, the guide surface area can support the strip  9907  adjacent the fasteners  110 B,  110 C and  110 D, thereby preventing those fasteners from flexing and angling or swinging into the opening  9055  as the fastener  110 A is advanced. This can prevent jamming of the fasteners within the nose assembly during a driving or advancing operation. 
     Optionally, as the feed mechanism  9032  and drive element  9814  compress or move during a drive action, the wing element  9087  and the guide surface  9058  can assist in keeping the strip  9907  of the collated fasteners  9905  perpendicular to the drive element  9814 . This can prevent jams caused by the fasteners  110 B,  110 C and  110 D by virtue of the flexible strip  9907  flexing and moving these fasteners downward in an undesired area, for example toward the guide pocket as fastener  110 A is being advanced. In some cases, where the guide surface  9058  does not engage the strip of the collated fasteners, the strip  9907  might bend toward the deck which could cause some of the succeeding fasteners  110 B,  110 C to enter the opening  9055  and interfere with the fastener  110 A being advanced in the pocket  9069 . 
       FIG. 102  illustrates the relationship between the collated fastener path CFP and the longitudinal axis  9400  of the angled bore  9088 , particularly in relationship to the leg  9056  and the pocket  9069 . As shown, the leg  9056  obstructs a portion of the collated fastener path CFP. To move the fasteners and in particular the fastener tips around the leg  9056 , the collector guide element  9081  and the diverter element  9082  engage upper portions of the fasteners so that the tips follow the collated fastener tip path CFTP. The collated fastener tip path CFTP is displaced outwardly relative to the leg  9056 . The tips of the respective fasteners remain displaced laterally from the remainder of the collated fastener path CFP as the tips travel along the collated fastener tip path CFTP, for example, until the respective fastener is queued for registration in the guide pocket  9069 . 
     At that point, the collated fastener tip path CFTP redirects the respective fastener laterally back toward the collated fastener path CFP in the direction of the arrow so that the fastener can enter the guide pocket  9069 , and can be substantially aligned with the longitudinal bore axis  9400 . This operation can entail the tip and the remainder of the shaft swinging, moving or tilting into the pocket guide  9069 , generally so the entire fastener is aligned with the longitudinal bore axis  9069 . This can be assisted via the physical structure of the guide pocket  9069  and/or the magnetic force exerted by the magnetic elements  9059 . 
     The operation of the installation tool  9060  of the thirteenth alternative embodiment and its related method of use are similar to the operation and related methods of the other tool embodiments herein, with several exceptions. For example, the installation tool  9060  can be loaded with collated fasteners  9905  and placed adjacent a corner of a board, of any of the types described herein, to advance a fastener into the board. With the collated fasteners loaded, the feed mechanism  9832  feeds the collated fasteners toward the nose assembly, as with the other embodiments, however, the individual fasteners move in a particular manner. 
     For example, as shown in  FIGS. 98 and 103 , the collated fasteners  9905  include multiple individual fasteners  110 A,  1108 ,  110 C,  110 D which are fastened to the flexible strip  9907 . These fasteners travel along the collated fastener path CFP, which can generally be a straight line or plane from the holder (not shown) extending toward the bore longitudinal axis  9400 . Of course, the fasteners and the tips and their locations relative to one another can vary somewhat due to the flexibility of the strip  9905 . Generally, however, when unaffected by components of the nose assembly, the fasteners travel with the heads and the tips substantially aligned along the collated fastener path CFP. This is indicated by the collated fastener head path CFHP and the collated fastener tip path CFTP in  FIG. 103 , being parallel to the collated fastener path CFP (with some optional minor deflections due to the flexibility of the strip). Thus, the collated fastener head path CFHP and the collated fastener tip path CFTP correspond to the collated fastener path CFP, at least during the period or segment P 1  as the individual fasteners approach the collector guide element  9081 . 
     When the collector guide element  9081  and/or the diverter element  9058  engage the fasteners during segment P 2 , the portions of the fasteners adjacent the tip and the tip itself move laterally in the direction L 3 , transitioning the collated fastener tip path CFTP away from the collated fastener path CFP so that the tips  110 T are displaced from the collated fastener path CFP by a tip offset distance TOD. Even with this offset movement and lateral displacement of the tip  110 T, the head  110 H of the fastener can continue to travel along the collated fastener head path CFHP, generally parallel to and coincident with the collated fastener path CFP, as shown in  FIG. 103 . 
     After the transition, the diverter element can maintain the collated fastener tip path CFTP offset from the CFP by the tip offset distance TOD for the segment P 3 . The tip offset distance TOD can be about 1/32 inches to about 1 inch, optionally about 1/16 inch to about ¾ of an inch, further optionally about ¼ inch to about ½ inch, depending on the application. Optionally, the tip offset distance TOD can be controlled by the configuration of the diverter element  9082 . For example, the diverter element can vary the tip offset distance TOD over the segment P 3 , so that the collated fastener tip path diverts in an arc from the collated fastener path CFP (when viewed from above), depending on the configuration of the diverter element. The diverter element  9082  also can offset the longitudinal axis LA of the fastener  1108 , as shown in  FIG. 100 , so that the longitudinal axis LA is transverse and/or non-parallel to the angled bore axis  9400 . The longitudinal axis LA can be offset from the bore axis  9400  at an angle α 10  from the plane coming out of the page through the longitudinal axis  9400 . This angle α 10  can range from about 1° to about 50°, optionally about 5° to about 40°, and further optionally about 15° to about 25°. 
     Generally, in this segment P 3 , the fastener also is tilted or angled away from the leg inner surface  9056 C, with the tip  110 T being located a first distance away from the inner surface  9056 C that is greater than a distance that the shaft  110 S of the fastener adjacent the head  110 H is away from the inner surface. Indeed, in this segment P 3 , the upper portion of the shaft  110 S′ ( FIG. 99 ) of fastener  1108  can engage the diverter element  9082  and be adjacent to it, while the tip  110 T′ can be separated a distance from the leg inner surface  9056 C, and not in engagement with that surface. 
     With further reference to  FIGS. 99, 100 and 103 , through segment P 3 , the collated fastener heads generally travel along the collated fastener head path CFHP parallel to and overlaying the collated fastener path CFP. The tip  110 T of the fasteners continue to travel along the collated fastener tip path CFTP, displaced a total offset distance TOD from the collated fastener path CFP for the segment P 3  as they advance toward the guide pocket  9069  and angled bore  9088 , generally being driven by fed feed mechanism  9832  in a manner similar to the other embodiments herein. 
     Optionally due to the open recess configuration of the nose assembly opening  9055 , the fasteners do not encounter any obstructions as they advance across a portion of the leg  9056  of the nose assembly  9050 . This can be due to the diverter element  9082  holding the fastener shaft and tip outward and tilted away from the leg and inner surface  9056 C of the leg  9056 . 
     As the fasteners are positioned for individual placement in the guide pocket  9069 , the tips  110 T of the fasteners travel in the direction shown in segment P 4  along the collated fastener tip path CFTP in  FIG. 103 . In the transition from segment P 3  to segment P 4 , the fasteners pass beyond an end of the diverter element  9082  so that the fastener shaft and tip move generally in lateral direction L 4  toward the collated fastener path CFP. 
     With further reference to  FIGS. 103 and 103A , as fasteners are advanced through segment P 3 , the fasteners are tilted away from the feed line or collated fastener path CFP, with the tips of the individual fasteners travelling along the collated fastener tip path CFTP. The heads  110 H, in contrast, generally stay inline and parallel to the collated fastener path CFP along the collated fastener head path CFTP. This is possible because as shown in  FIG. 99 , the heads are generally above the nose assembly  9050 , and the guide surface  9058 , while being advanced in the collated fastener strip  9907 . As soon as the shaft or portion of the fastener  110 A clears the diverter element  9082 , the fastener  110  swings, moves or tilts into the guide pocket  9069 , by virtue of the material of the strip  9907  resiliently springing it in this direction and/or the magnetic force exerted by the magnetic elements  9059 . 
     As the fastener swings or generally moves into the pocket, several things can occur. For example, the tip  110 T and at least a portion of the shaft  110 S of the fastener travel transversely to the overall feed line of the collated fasteners  9905 , and more particularly, transversely to the collated fastener path CFP. Generally, before such transverse movement, the tip is displaced laterally a distance equal to the tip offset distance TOD. In the transverse movement, the tip can travel along an arcuate path P 4 ′ and/or an angled path P 4 ″. Of course, this path can be of multiple compound arcs or intersecting angles, or combinations thereof, depending on the transition from the diverter element  9082  to the guide channel  9069 . Indeed, in some cases, the tip can travel perpendicularly to the collated fastener path CFP. The tip  100 T continues its transverse movement relative to the collated fastener feed line or collated fastener path CFP until it substantially registers in the guide pocket  9069 , as shown in  FIG. 103A . There, the threads, tip  110 T and/or shaft of the fastener are held by the magnetic force exerted by the optional magnetic elements  9059 . 
     During the transverse movement of the tip  110 T in segment P 4 , the head  110 H of the fastener, generally moves along its collated fastener head path CFHP, which is aligned with and substantially overlaps the collated faster feed line or collated fastener path CFP. Thus, in this segment P 4 , the head  100 H moves generally along the collated fastener path CFP, while the tip  110 T is tilting, swinging or otherwise moving back toward that collated fastener path CFP. Further, the movement of the tip  110  is transverse to the collated fastener path CFP in this segment so that the tip and shaft of the fastener can pass into the guide pocket opening  90690  and register in the guide pocket  9069 . Throughout the movement of the fastener in segment P 4 , and even when the tip  100 T and the shaft enter into pocket  9069 , the head  110 H can remain generally removed from or outside the pocket  9069 . For example, as shown in  FIG. 99 , the head  110 H remains above the guide pocket  9069 . The head  110 H, which can also be included in the strip of material  9907 , also can be located above the guide surface  9058 , and generally the nose assembly  9050  itself. Of course, as described below, when the drive element  9814  engages and moves the fastener, the head  110 H eventually is pushed or moved into and through at least a portion of the guide pocket  9069 . 
     The individual fastener as shown in  FIGS. 100 and 104 , and in particular the tip  110 T and shaft, can be urged into the guide pocket  9069  to ensure positive registration within it by a magnetic force exerted by the magnetic elements  9059  pulling the shaft into the pocket and/or the configuration of the pocket  9069 . In some cases the fastener shaft can engage the magnets. Additionally or alternatively, the tips and the shafts can be pulled into the pocket by way of the flexible material resiliently deflecting those elements back into the pocket  9069  after the fastener has passed the diverter element  9082 . Where used, the magnetic elements can ensure a positive registration of the fastener within the pocket. Sometimes, an audible click can be heard when the fastener registers within the pocket  9069 . 
     With the fastener  110 A, shown in  FIGS. 99, 100 and 104 , registered in the pocket  9069 , that fastener is aligned generally along the longitudinal axis  9400  of the bore and precisely aligned with the opening  9084  of the guide  9080 . The drive element  9814  can begin to advance the fastener upon such registration. When the drive element engages the head of the fastener, the fastener rotates in direction R 14  as shown in  FIG. 104 . The fastener moves along the longitudinal axis  9400 , rotating as it goes. The head  110 H of the fastener  110 A is constrained within the pocket  9069  during this advancement, at least for the first portion of the advancement, until the tip of the fastener engages the board into which the fastener is being advanced. The pocket  9069 , and optionally the magnets, ensure that the fastener shaft and head stay aligned with the longitudinal axis  9400  of the longitudinal bore, and thus aligned with the desired advancement trajectory of the fastener into the board. 
     This alignment can be ensured with the nose assembly and guide pocket, regardless of the forces applied to the fastener by the board or other elements during advancement. For example, if the board presents the fastener with an angled surface that typically would cause the fastener to deflect, dive and/or tilt, the guide pocket constrains the rotation of the head of the fastener, and counters this deflection. This, in turn, maintains the screw substantially aligned with the longitudinal axis  9400  so that it does not tilt off of the desired trajectory upon being advanced into the board. 
     Further, when the head of the fastener enters the opening  9084  and more particularly the angled bore  9088 , the head is circumferentiated or surrounded more so than when in the pocket  9069 . Accordingly, the fastener is further constrained to keep it along the desired advancement trajectory so it can be driven at an angle into the side surface and/or corner or a respective board as described in any of the embodiments herein. After the fastener is satisfactorily advanced, the tool can be reset and used to advance additional fasteners in a similar manner. 
     As an additional example, the tool  9060  can be used in connection with boards placed immediately adjacent one another with no or small gaps between the boards. With reference to  FIG. 105 , the foot  9051  of the nose assembly  9050  can be placed adjacent an upper surface  9111  of board  9102 . The inner engagement surface  9092  can be placed immediately adjacent the side surface  9108  and/or corner  9109  of the board. A fastener can subsequently be advanced into this corner along the longitudinal axis  9400  of the bore  9088 . 
     As with some other embodiments herein, where the tool  9060  is used so that the alignment projection or wedge  9090  is wedged between adjacent boards  9102  and  9103  to advance a fastener, the particular radii of the board corners and the engagement of back wall or outer engagement surface  9093  with the adjacent board  9103  can affect the overall depth at which the fastener is driven into the board  9102 . For example, as shown in  FIG. 105 , the radii of the respective corners  9109  and  9119  of boards  9102  and  9103  are sufficiently large so as to form a large crevice  9109 C between the corners. The alignment projection or wedge  9090  fits within that crevice. The outer engagement surface of back wall  9093  engages the corner  9119  of the prior laid board  9103 . In turn, this engagement of the outer engagement surface with the already laid board  9103  sets the depth D 8  at which the fastener can be advanced along the longitudinal axis  9400 . The fitment of the entire wedge  9090  within the crevice also enables the bottom surface  9069  of the foot  9051  to rest against the upper surface  9111  of the board  9102 . 
     As another example,  FIG. 106  shows a crevice  9109 C′ between the respective corners  9109 ′ and  9119 ′ is relatively small. There, the alignment projection or wedge  9090  only fits partially into the crevice between the respective corners  9109 ′ and  9119 ′. The outer engagement surface  9093  engages the opposing corner  9119 ′ of the existing board  9103 ′. This engagement sets the depth D 9  at which the screw is advanced along the longitudinal axis  9400  into the corner  9109 ′. This depth, D 9 , is less than the depth D 8  shown in  FIG. 105 . Further, due to the wedge only sitting partially into the crevice as shown in  FIG. 106 , the bottom surface  9069  is offset at an angle relative to the upper surface  9111 ′ of the board  9102 ′. 
     As described in connection with the some other embodiments herein, with different sized crevices between the respective corners of boards, the outer engagement surface  9093  can engage a prior laid board to set the screw as deep as possible without allowing the screw to bite into or mar the corner or radius of the prior laid board. The other operations of the tool are similar to those mentioned in other embodiments herein, and therefore will not be repeated here. 
     XVIII. Fourteenth Alternative Tool and Method Embodiment 
     A fourteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool is illustrated in  FIGS. 107-111  and generally designated  10060 . The installation tool shown there is similar in construction and operation to the embodiments described above with several exceptions. For example, the tool  10060  is configured to work in conjunction with the integral or selectively attachable driving tool  10010  such as the drills or hand tools described herein. The tool  10060  is also configured so that the user thereof can operate the tool and install fasteners from a standing or otherwise elevated position, as with some of the other embodiments herein. 
     Sometimes, a challenge with advancing fasteners from a standing position is that the user cannot attain sufficient footing or cannot stabilize their body to precisely position and push the driving tool  10010  to advance a fastener through the nose  10050  and precisely into a substrate or board  10102 . This embodiment includes a push handle assembly  10061  to facilitate the application of force by a user to the nose assembly, an alignment projection and/or foot to ensure these elements contact the substrate in a satisfactory manner and advance a screw into the substrate  10102 . For example as shown in  FIGS. 107-111 , the push handle assembly  10061  includes a push bar  10065  and a push handle  10063 . The lowermost portion  10065 B can be rigidly and fixedly attached to the nose  10050  as shown in  FIG. 111 . The push bar  10065  can extends upwardly, generally parallel or somewhat aligned with and/or adjacent the extension tube  10020  extending from the driving tool  10010  to the feed mechanism  10032  and/or the nose assembly  10050 . Incidentally, all of the components of the nose assembly  10050  feed mechanism, and other components of the installation tool  10060  can be similar if not identical to any of the other embodiments herein. 
     The push handle assembly  10061  effectively enables a user, for example as shown in  FIG. 1007  to depress the push handle portion  10063  and exert a force through the push bar  10065  to the nose assembly  10050 . In turn, this enables the user to push with that force the alignment projection  10090  against a side surface  10108  and advance a fastener into the substrate  10102 . The transmission of this force through the push handle  10060  can also enable a user to effectively bring the foot  10051  of the nose assembly against an upper surface of the substrate  10102 , and generally ensure proper alignment of the alignment projection  10090  with the side surface  10108  when a fastener is to be driven into that side surface. 
     Generally, the push handle assembly  10061  can enable a user to apply a force through the push handle assembly and push bar  10065  directly to the nose assembly  10050 , yet still move the extension tube  10020  and driving tool  10010  toward the nose assembly  10050  under another force. The driving tool and feeding mechanism  10032  can be movably attached to the nose assembly  10050  to advance the fastener, while the push handle assembly  10061  can be rigidly and immovably attached to the nose assembly  10050 . Again this optionally can enable a user to exert and transmit one force through the push handle assembly  10061  to the nose assembly  10050  and bring the associated alignment projection  10090  and foot (if included)  10051  into sufficient engagement with a substrate  10102  during the advancement of a fastener into the substrate, and another force through the extension, feed mechanism and/or nose assembly to the fastener to advance the fastener into the substrate. This application of force via the push bar assembly can be helpful where a user is standing on a platform or joists adjacent the substrate or board  10102 , but does not have good footing to stand and simultaneously push the nose assembly into contact with the board. 
     As shown in  FIG. 111 , the push bar  10065  and in particular its lower end  10065 B can be rigidly and fixedly attached to the nose assembly. This can enable a force to be transmitted directly through the push bar  10065  to the nose assembly  10050  and subsequently to the alignment projection  10090 , thereby pushing it directly up against a side surface  10108  of a substrate. The bottom  10065 B can be attached to the nose assembly and in particular a rearward extension  10053  of the nose assembly  10050 . The rearward extension can extend rearward from the pocket  10069  of the nose assembly  10050 , and/or generally in an opposite direction from the foot  10051 , relative to the alignment projection  10090 . Optionally, the extension  10053  extends rearward from the alignment projection  10090  while the foot  10051  extends forward of the alignment projection  10090 . 
     Although shown as separate pieces, the push bar  10065  and the extension  10053  can be integrally formed as a single piece unit. In  FIG. 111 , the push bar bottom  10065 B is attached via a screw  10062  via a fastener  10062  to the extension  10053 . In some limited cases, the push bar  10065  can be pivotally attached to the extension  10053  and/or nose assembly  10050  in general. Further optionally, the angle of the push bar  10065  relative to the extension  10020  can be varied to enable a user to customize the angle at which they apply force through the nose assembly  10050  to a substrate  10102 . 
     As shown in  FIGS. 108 and 110 , the push bar  10065  of the push handle assembly can be an elongated tubular member that extends from the nose assembly  10050  upwardly adjacent the extension tube  10020 . Although shown as a tube, the push bar  10065  can be a solid construction, such as a rigid bar or some other elongated structure. A push bar handle  10063  can be mounted to the upper end  10065 A of the bar  10065 . The push bar handle  10063  can be perpendicular to the push bar  10065 , if desired, extending laterally from opposing sides of the push bar  10065 . In some applications, however the bar may only extend from one lateral side of the push bar  10065 . Further, in some applications, the precise angle of the handle  10063  to the push bar  10065  can be varied to ergonomically accommodate a user&#39;s pushing technique on the push handle assembly. 
     Optionally, although not shown, the handle  10063  can be connected at the junction  10063 A with the upper end  10065 A of the push bar  10065  with a swivel or pivot element that allows a user to swivel a single handle about a longitudinal axis of the push bar  10065 , from one lateral side to the other. Further optionally, the handle  10063  may only be a shortened handle that extends in one direction away from the push bar  10065 , rather than in both directions as shown in  FIG. 110 . In such a case, with the swivel at the junction  10063 A, or somewhere else along the push bar, a user can readily pivot the handle  10063  from one lateral side to the other, depending on whether the user is left-handed or right-handed, or depending on the particular orientation of the tool relative to a substrate  10102 . 
     The push handle assembly  10061  can be attached to the extension tube  10020  or other components of the driving tool  10060 . For example, the push bar  10065  can be attached via a bracket  10064  to the extension tube  10020 . This bracket  10064  can securely mount to the push bar  10065  at a fixed location or distance from the extension, the feed mechanism and/or the nose assembly. Optionally, the bracket can attach the push bar to the extension tube in a moving or sliding relationship. For example, as shown in  FIG. 110 , the diameter or other dimension of a hole  10064 A, through which the extension tube  10020  can be placed, can slightly larger than the outermost diameter or other largest dimension of the extension tube  10020 . Accordingly, the extension tube  10020  can slide within that hole  10064 A during a fastener advancing operation. Of course, in an alternative construction, the bracket  10064  can be rigidly attached to the tube  10020  but can move or slide relative to the push bar  10065 . Further, although shown with the bracket  10064  mounted about midway between the nose assembly  10050  and the driving tool  10010 , the bracket can be mounted at virtually any location along the extension tube and/or push bar  10065 . If desired, the bracket can be incorporated into a portion of the push handle  10063 . 
     Operation of the fastener installation tool of the fourteenth alternative embodiment will now be described with reference to  FIGS. 107-111 . As shown in  FIGS. 107 and 111 , the feed mechanism  10032  is generally a distance D 10  from the nose assembly  10050  at the beginning of an advancement of a fastener. In this configuration, the feed mechanism  10032  has advanced a fastener  10110  sufficiently into the pocket  10069  of the nose assembly  10050 , readying the fastener to be advanced into a substrate  10102 . The user can grasp the driving tool  10110  with one hand. The user can the handle  10063  of the push handle assembly with their other hand, and can place their knee or thigh T against that handle as well. The user can apply a first force F 6  such as those described in other embodiments herein to the driving to advance the fastener within the nose assembly. The user can apply a second force F 7  to the handle  10063  with their thigh and/or hand. With the handle generally engaging the user&#39;s thigh T, the user can apply additional force by leaning into the handle  10063 . This second force F 7  force is transmitted through the handle  10063  through the push bar  10065  and directly to the nose assembly  10050 . In turn, the alignment projection  10090  can engage the side surface  10108  of the substrate or board  10102  with sufficient force so that when the screw begins to advance into the substrate, it satisfactorily enters and continues in the side surface and/or substrate  10102 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 108 , the use continues to apply a force by engaging their thigh T against the handle and push bar to continue to apply the force through the nose assembly  10050  against the substrate  10102 . In this portion of the operation, the screw is advanced into the substrate and in particular the side surface  10108 . In so doing, the feed mechanism  10032  begins to advance toward the nose assembly  10050  thereby reducing the distance D 10  to a second distance D 11 , which is less than the first distance D 10 . To advance the feed mechanism  10032 , the user continues to apply a second and separate force F 6 , different from the one applied through their thigh T, to the driving tool  10010 . This in turn causes the extension tube  10020  to push downwardly the feed mechanism  10032 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 108 , the extension tube  10020  slides relative to the bracket  10064  and thereby also moves relative to the push handle assembly  10061 . During this movement of the other components, however, the push handle assembly  10061  and its components remain rigidly and fixedly attached to the nose assembly  10050 , and therefore do not move relative to the nose assembly  10050 . Again, this is in contrast to the feed mechanism, extension bar and/or driving tool  10010 , which move relative to the nose assembly and generally toward it during advancement of the fastener. 
     As shown in  FIG. 109 , the fastener advancing operation continues, with the fastener advancing farther into the substrate  10102 . The feed mechanism and other elements move to a distance D 12  away from the nose assembly. This distance D 12  can be a distance of about 0 inches or slightly more. Generally, the feed mechanism  10032  can bottom out adjacent the nose assembly  10050  in this configuration, which also corresponds to the fastener being fully advanced by the fastener installation tool  10060  into the side surface and/or other surface of the substrate  10102 . This distance D 12  is less than the distance D 11 , and less than the distance D 10 . 
     Generally, as shown in  FIGS. 108 and 109 , the user can apply a first force F 6  with a first hand directed to the driving tool  10010 . This force F 6  is transmitted to promote movement of the driving tool  10010  toward the feed mechanism and/or nose assembly  10050 , which in turn advances the fastener  10110  into the substrate when the nose assembly is properly positioned. The user also applies a second force F 7  through their thigh T and/or other hand directly to the push handle assembly  10061 . The second force effectively is transmitted to the nose assembly  10050  to force the nose assembly against a substrate, for example the alignment projection  10090  against a side surface  10108  and the foot  10051  (where included) against the upper surface of the substrate  10102 . 
     Optionally the first force F 6  transmitted through the driving tool of the feed mechanism operates to advance the fastener into the substrate, whereas the second force F 7  administered through the push handle assembly  10061  transmits a force, separate from the first force, to the nose assembly to ensure engagement of the nose assembly with a substrate. The second force F 7  does not operate to advance the fastener through the nose assembly  10050 , the alignment projection  10090 , or any other associated components of the tool. 
     XIX. Fifteenth Alternative Tool and Method Embodiment 
     A fifteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool and related method is illustrated in  FIGS. 112-117  and generally designated  11060 . This embodiment, like the embodiments above, can be well suited for use with shrinkable boards or other types of boards as described herein. Moreover, this embodiment is well suited for the types of fasteners in the embodiments described herein, as well as any other type of fasteners. For example, the tool can be used to advance the side angle fasteners  10 ,  110 ,  21 ,  310  at the respective advanced orientations and using the techniques herein, and/or conventional pointed-tip fasteners. 
     The installation tool of the fifteenth alternative embodiment also is similar in construction and operation to the embodiments described above with several exceptions. For example the fifteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool can be for use in advancing individual fasteners, one at time, into a side surface and/or corner of a board, for example, a shrinkable board, as described in conjunction with the embodiments of the other fasteners and tools herein. 
     The fifteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool  11060  can also include the elongated shaft  11062 , guide  11080 , alignment projection  11090 , shaft bore  11063 A, guide bore  11088  and other features of the eleventh and twelfth alternative embodiments of the installation tool  7060  and  8060  described above. In addition, the tool can include a drive element  11014  that is reciprocally mounted within one or both of the shaft bore  11063 A and guide bore  11088  of the elongated shaft  11062  and guide  11088 , and that moves relative to the shaft, guide and/or alignment projection. 
     With more particularity, turning to  FIGS. 112-116 , the tool can include a primary housing or sleeve  11017  mounted to and/or joined with a secondary housing or sleeve  11016 . The primary housing  11017  can include ergonomic contours to enhance a user&#39;s grip on the tool, preventing it from rotating when it is joined with a driving tool and when a fastener is being advanced by the tool. The primary housing  11016  can include a lower surface  11019  which can be configured to engage the upper surface of the substrate during a fastener advancing operation. This lower surface, also referred to as a substrate engaging surface  11019 , can be generally positioned around at least a portion of the guide  11080  and/or the alignment projection  11090 . The substrate engaging surface  11019  generally can be flush or slightly recessed above or below the forward and rearward engagement surfaces  11069  and  11068  that are located forward and rearward of the alignment projection as described in connection with other embodiments herein. 
     The primary housing  11016  can further define a shaft bore  11013 . The shaft bore  11013  can house at a portion of the elongated shaft  11062  which itself defines the angled bore  11088  as well as a portion of the guide  11080 , which is joined with an/or adjacent the elongated shaft, and which defines the angled bore  11088 . The housing  11017  can include a shoulder engagement surface or shoulder  11012  which is configured to engage a shoulder  11063  located adjacent the guide  11080  and the elongated shaft  11062 , or some other structure of these components. This engagement can ensure that the shaft  11062  is not unintentionally forcibly pushed upward into the housing  11017  during a fastener advancing operation. If desired, a secondary fastener (not shown) can be placed through the housing engaging a portion of the elongated shaft  11062  or guide to secure it in place within the bore  11013 . 
     As further shown in  FIG. 117 , the housing  11017  can define the internal bore  11018  extending generally from the shoulder  11012  upward to an upper or first end  11011  of the housing  11017 . This internal bore  11018  can be sized to receive at least a portion of the elongated shaft  11062  and the corresponding shaft bore and/or angled bore. The internal bore  11018  also can be sized to receive and house at least a portion of the drive element  11014 , as well as a bias element  11018 A. 
     The bias element  11018 A as shown can be a coil spring. It can be interposed between a portion of the housing  11017 , for example the shoulder  11012 , and the upper end  11011  of the housing. Generally, the bias member  11018 A urges the secondary housing  11016  to the generally opened or extended mode as shown in  FIG. 117 . This extended mode is sufficient to move the drive element  11014 , in particular the drive element head  11014 H, within the angled bore  11088  and/or shaft bore  11063 A so that a fastener can be positioned in the same, substantially entirely within one or both of those bores without protruding beyond the second opening  11085 . 
     Generally, the bias member can reset the tool, readying it to be loaded with a fastener. The bias member  11018 A can engage a portion of the secondary sleeve, for example the sleeve pin  11016 P and the shoulder  11012  of the housing  11017 . The bias member can urge the secondary housing or sleeve  11016  to the extended mode as shown in the figures, which can also ready it for the loading of a fastener in the angled bore and/or shaft bore. The bias member can operate to slow down the advancement of the fastener as the drive element  11014  is advanced and rotated within the shaft bore  11063 A and/or the angled bore  11088 . Further, although shown as the coil spring, the bias member can be in the form of an elastomeric element, a leaf spring, or some other biasing element configured to extend or move the drive element  11014  relative to the angled bore  11088  or generally away from the second opening  11085  of the tool  11060 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 117 , the elongated shaft member  11062  defines a shaft bore  11063 A that is generally aligned with and forms an extension of the angled bore  11088  defined by the guide  11080 . The guide and elongated shaft can be an integral, monolithic part as shown, or they can be separately constructed components, depending on the particular application. Generally the shaft bore is configured to receive the drive element  11014 . Because the shaft bore and angled bore can be contiguous, the angled bore can also receive the drive element during an advancing operation. Indeed, the drive element and drive head or drive feature can both be rotated and reciprocally extended and/or retracted therethrough. 
     Optionally, the elongated shaft  11062  and/or guide  11080  can be outfitted with a magnet or the magnetic element  11066  which can be configured in close proximity to the shaft bore  11063 A and/or angled bore  11088 . This magnetic element can exert a magnetic force on a fastener disposed within the angled bore  11088  to hold it in place, readied for advancement. 
     The secondary housing  11016  can define a first end  11016 B and a second end  11016 C. This first end  11016 B can be partially received within the primary housing  11017  and in particular inside the bore  11018  defined by the primary housing  11017 . The second end  11016 C can be configured to attach generally to a tool bit  11015 , and optionally a nut assembly  11020  as described below. As with the other embodiments herein, the tool bit can be configured to be inserted in or otherwise joined with a drive chuck of a driving tool. 
     The secondary housing  11016  and primary housing  11017  can be coupled to one another so they are generally non-separable, and so that they are constrained to a predefined movement relative to one another. For example, the secondary housing  11016  can also include a pin  11016 P. This pin can be integral with the housing, or it can be a fastener attached to the housing. The pin  11016 P can be registered in a housing slot  11017 S defined by the primary housing. This pin  11016 P, by virtue of its registration within the slot  11017 S generally maintains the connection between the primary housing  11017  and the secondary housing  11016 . Of course, the pin  11016 P and slot  11017 S configuration can be replaces with some other construction to ensure that the two components remain connected to one another, even when the bias member  11018 A biases the tool to the extended mode as shown in  FIG. 117 . 
     The interaction of the slot  11017 S and the pin  11016 P also can limit the range of motion of the housings relative to one another, as well as the advancement of the drive element and drive head in the respective bores, and thus the depth of advancement of a fastener advanced with the tool. For example, the slot  11017 S of the housing  11017  can include a stop end  11017 S′. This stop end can engage the pin  11016 P when the secondary housing  11016  is moved into the primary housing  11017 . This stop end can stop the motion or advancement of the secondary housing into the primary housing, and thus stop any further advancement of the drive element  11014  and its head into the angled bore  11088 , and thus any further advancement of the fastener associated with the drive head  11014 H of the tool. 
     The advancement of the drive element  11014  and movement of the secondary housing  11016  can also be retarded or stopped by engagement of the lower or second end  11016 B of the secondary housing  11016  with the shoulder  11012  of the housing  11017 . Indeed, in some cases the slot and pin configuration can be absent altogether and the engagement of the secondary housing with the shoulder within the primary housing  11017  can be the primary structure that stops the advancement and movement of the secondary housing relative to the primary housing and/or the drive element  11014  relative to the inside of the shaft bore  11063 A and/or angled bore  11088 . 
     The secondary housing  11016  also can define an internal bore  110161 . This internal bore  110161  can be of a sufficient size so that when the secondary housing  11016  is fully inserted in the internal bore  11018  of the primary housing  11017 , the elongated shaft  11062  can be located within the internal bore  110161 . Generally, the internal bore  110161  can be dimensioned slightly larger than the elongated shaft to accommodate it. 
     The tool  11060  of the fifteenth alternative embodiment also can include drive element replacement assembly  1102  as shown in  FIG. 117 . The drive element replacement assembly  11020  can include a nut assembly  11021  having threads  11021 A that threadably engage portions of the secondary housing  11016  to couple the assembly  11020  to the secondary housing  11016 . Optionally an O-ring, or other connecting or fastening element  11024  can be disposed between the nut assembly  11021  and the secondary housing  11016  so the two remain generally attached and do not unthread due to vibration or rotation. 
     As illustrated, the nut assembly  11021  can include an outer hexagonal shaped surface for a tool to engage and rotate the assembly off of the secondary housing  11016 . Optionally, the shape of the outer surface of the assembly can be knurled so that a user can manually unscrew or remove the assembly  11020  from the secondary housing  11016 . 
     With reference to  FIG. 117 , the tool bit  11015  can be rotationally mounted within the nut assembly  11021 . The nut body  11021  defines an internal bore  11029 . Within this internal bore  11029  the tool bit  11015  is rotationally mounted and disposed. 
     The drive element replacement assembly  11020  can also include a system to capture the tool bit  11015  relative to the nut assembly  11021 . For example, a ring  11022  can be fixedly attached via a friction fit, a weld, a fastener, adhesion or some other mechanism directly to the bit  11015 . Below the nut assembly body  11021 , the bit  11015  can define a groove or slot  11025 . An e-clip or other type of clip  11025 R can be disposed within that slot to further secure the bit  11015  to the assembly  11021 . Other devices can be used to secure the bit  11015  to the body  11021  as desired. 
     Optionally, a bearing  11023  can be disposed between the bit  11015  and the nut assembly  11021  to facilitate rotation of the bit  11015  within the bore of the assembly  11021 . Of course if desired, the bearing can be eliminated. The bit  11015  can also define a socket  11026  which receives at least a portion of the drive element  11014 . 
     With the tool  11060  including the drive element replacement assembly  11020  shown in  FIG. 117 , a user can easily replace a worn out drive element  11014 , for example, where the head  11014 H of the drive element is worn or stripped. To do so, a user can unthread the nut assembly  11021  from the secondary housing  11016 . The user can then remove the drive element  11014  from the socket  11026  of the tool bit  11015  and replace it with a new, fresh drive element. The user can then reassemble the tool by threading the nut assembly  11021  back into the secondary housing  11016 . 
     Operation of the tool  11060  is similar to that of the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments described above. Suffice it to say that a fastener is placed in the angled bore  11088  and/or shaft bore  11063 A. A driving tool is attached to the tool bit  11015 . The alignment projection  11090  is positioned adjacent a bore with the second opening  11085  facing the side surface and/or corner of a board, and with the forward surface  11069  facing an upper surface of the board. The driving tool is operated to rotate the bit  11015 , which in turn rotates the drive element  11014 . The head  11014 H engages the fastener. 
     The user applies a force and can hold the housing  11017  to prevent it from rotating. The drive element  11014  is pushed downward within the shaft bore and the angled bore. The fastener advances out of the second opening  11085  and into a board (not shown). The bias member  11018 A compresses and the secondary body  11016  moves down a distance D until the pin  11016 P bottoms out in the bottom of the slot  11017 S′. Due to the bottoming out, the user is provided with tactile feedback, which informs them that the fastener is fully advanced, so the tool can be moved to a new fastener advancement position. 
     When the user begins to disengage the tool, and the previously applied force is removed, the bias member  11018 A urges the secondary housing  11016  from a retracted to the extended mode shown in  FIG. 117 . The driving head  11014 H moves upward within the shaft bore  11063 A and/or angled bore  11088 , away from the opening  11085 , so that another fastener can be placed in the bore for another installation procedure. 
     XX. Sixteenth Alternative Tool and Method Embodiment 
     A sixteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool and related method is illustrated in  FIGS. 118-121  and generally designated  12060 . This embodiment, like the embodiments above can be well suited for use with shrinkable boards, or other types of boards as described herein. Moreover, this embodiment is well suited for the types of fasteners in the embodiments described herein, as well as any other type of fasteners. For example, the tool can be used to advance the side angled fasteners  10 ,  110 ,  210 ,  310  at the respective advancement orientations and using the techniques herein, and/or conventional pointed-tip fasteners. The installation tool of the sixteenth alternative embodiment also is similar in construction and operation to the embodiments described herein with several exceptions. 
     For example, turning to  FIGS. 118-121 , the sixteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener tool  12060  generally includes a nose assembly  12050  which is joined with a feed mechanism  12032  like the other feed mechanism of other embodiments herein. A driving element can be coupled to a driving tool (not shown). All of these components can be similar in structure and function to that in the alternative embodiments herein, for example, at least the eighth through thirteenth embodiments above. 
     The nose assembly  12050  can be constructed to include a guide  12080  and an alignment projection  12090 . These components can be substantially identical to those of the other embodiments herein, for example, the eighth through thirteenth embodiments above. Indeed, the components can have the same structure and function as those described herein and will therefore not be described here again in detail. Suffice it to say that the guide  12080  can define an angled bore  12088  that includes a first opening  12084  in communication with the nose assembly opening  12055 . The guide  12080  can also be joined with and/or include the alignment projection  12090 , which can include the inner engagement surface  12092  and an outer engagement surface  12093 , and can define at least a portion of the angled bore. The inner engagement surface can define the exit or second opening  12085  of the angled bore  12088 , which extends along a longitudinal axis  12400 . These features again are similar to those in the embodiments described above and below. 
     As shown in  FIGS. 118 and 119 , nose assembly opening  12055  can open to the environment on one side of the nose assembly. The nose assembly opening  12055  can be aligned with a collated fastener path CFP along which collated fasteners travel. The nose assembly can include a pocket element  12070  disposed within the opening  12055  that operates to form at least a portion of a guide pocket  12069 . The guide pocket  12069  can be aligned with the angled bore  12088  or more generally the axis of rotation  12400  of the fastener. The guide pocket  12069  can capture and/or guide a portion of a fastener, for example, the head of a screw, and can assist in aligning the fastener with an opening  12084  of the angled bore  12088  so that the fastener consistently feeds into the angled bore  12088 . Moreover, the guide pocket  12069  and its interaction with a fastener can prevent the fastener, as it is advanced into a board, from diving, deflecting, or otherwise becoming misaligned with the bore  12088  or tool, which could cause a jam or misfeed in the angled bore or nose assembly. 
     As shown in  FIGS. 119 and 120 , the guide pocket generally is located within the nose assembly opening  12055 , and defined by the pocket element  12070 , located in the opening, and adjacent the exterior surface  12067  of the nose assembly. Generally, the exterior surface  12067  of the nose assembly is flat or planar, but optionally can be curved and/or include some surface contours if desired. The pocket element  12070  is joined with the nose assembly, optionally the exterior surface. This joining can be via a fastener  12074 , which can be in the form of a pin, a threaded element, or some other construction. 
     The pocket element  12070  at least partially defines the guide pocket  12069  with the exterior surface  12067 . The pocket element includes a side wall  12073  and a back or stop wall  12072 . The side wall  12073  and back wall  12072  can be transverse to one another, for example perpendicular to one another, or at some other angle relative to one another. If desired, the back wall  12072  and side wall  12073  can be contiguous, and can form a rounded surface where they connect or elsewhere. Further, although shown as one part of a monolithic, single piece pocket element, these walls can be parts of separate components, independent of one another. 
     The pocket element  12070  can be configured and oriented to obstruct or be placed within the collated fastener path CFP. As illustrated in  FIGS. 118-120 , the pocket element side wall  12073  can be generally parallel to the collated fastener path CFP, and the back wall  12072  can be generally transverse to collated fastener path CFP. The back wall  12072  can optionally be placed directly in the collated fastener path CFP so the fasteners associated with the collated strip  12907  cannot pass through the guide pocket without engaging the back wall  12072  or at least resting or briefly contacting it during a driving operation of the fastener. Upon such contact, the fasteners are generally impaired from further linear movement along the collated fastener path CFP, but are not prevented from rotation. 
     The pocket element  12070  can be moveable relative to the nose assembly  12050  and/or the exterior surface  12067  of the nose assembly. For example, the pocket element  12070  can be rotatably or pivotally attached to the nose assembly so it can move out of way of the collated fastener path CFP. In particular, the back wall  12072  can be moved out of the collated fastener path CFP as shown in  FIG. 121 . In such a construction, the pocket element  12070  can be pivotally attached to nose assembly  12050 , with the lower part of the pocket element  12070  attached via the fastener  12074 . The pocket element  12070  can selectively pivot about pivot axis PA. The pocket element  12070  can be rotated in a plane parallel to the exterior surface  12067  of the nose assembly. The pocket element  12070 , and the back wall  12072 , can be swung out of the collated fastener path CFP, optionally downward and forward of the opening  12055  as shown in  FIG. 121 . 
     If desired, however, the pocket element can be moveable relative to the nose assembly  12050  in other configurations. For example, the pocket element  12070  can pivot or rotate about an axis (not shown) that is parallel, rather than transverse to the collated fastener path CFP, and that is generally parallel to the axis of rotation  12400  of the fastener. In such a configuration, the pocket element can swing outward, away from the exterior surface  12067 , with the back wall  12072  moving outward and away from the collated fastener path CFP, optionally travelling along an arc as it does so. As another example, the pocket element  12070  can pivot or rotate about an axis that is parallel, rather than transverse to the collated fastener path CFP, and generally perpendicular to the axis of rotation  12400  of the fastener. In such a configuration, the pocket element  12070  can swing outward, away from the exterior surface, with the back wall  12072  moving outward and away from the collated fastener path CFP, generally travelling along an arc, but where the pocket element pivots downwardly, away from the exterior surface of the nose assembly  12050 . 
     Generally, the pocket element  12070  is operable in a pocket mode and a service mode. In the pocket mode, shown in  FIGS. 118-120 , the pocket element  12070  completes the guide pocket  12069 . In the pocket mode, the exterior surface  12067  of the nose assembly  12050 , and the back wall and the side wall of the pocket element collectively form the guide pocket  12069  within which the fastener initially rotates as it is engaged by a driving tool, for example, the head of the fastener is engaged by a bit of the driving tool. In the pocket mode, the fastener can be rotationally constrained around optionally at least 50%, further optionally at least 65%, even further optionally at least 75% of the circumference of the fastener, so the fastener is adequately constrained to rotate within a small area or volume, without wobbling or moving significantly out of the same. Further optionally, the screw is surrounded by three “sides” of the guide pocket, that is, the back wall, the exterior surface and the side wall. This can ensure that the fastener is advanced directly and consistently into the guide  12080 , for example, the bore  12088  and its opening  12084 . 
     If a screw jams or does not feed properly into the guide  12080  or the opening  12084 , or if the collated fastener strip becomes lodged or jams in the tool, the pocket element  12070  can be converted to the service mode, which is shown in  FIG. 121 . In the service mode, the pocket element  12070  is rotated about the axis PA. The back wall  12072  is thus moved out of the collated fastener path CFP, and the side wall  12073  is moved generally away from the collated fastener path CFP so that access can be gained to the collated fastener path CFP, as well as any fasteners or the collated strip  12907 . With the pocket element  12070  moved to the service mode position, the collated strip  12907  can be advanced forward or backward to clear the jam, or otherwise access a fastener in the nose assembly  12050  to clear a jam or otherwise service the nose assembly. After this, the pocket element  12070  can be swung back to the pocket mode shown in  FIGS. 118-120 . 
     With reference to  FIGS. 119-120 , the pocket element  12070  can include a locking element  12077  to secure the pocket element  12070  in the pocket mode and/or the service mode. The locking element  12077  can be a screw that engages a corresponding element, such as a recess  12078  or threaded hole in the exterior surface  12067  of the nose assembly  12050  to secure the pocket element  12070  in the pocket mode. Generally, the locking element prevents the pocket element from rotating about the pivot axis PA. Where the pocket element  12070  moves in other directions, the screw can prevent that movement as well. Optionally, the screw and corresponding structure can be replaced with a detent, a set screw, a cam, a spring loaded pin, or other locking device to lock the pocket element  12070  in the pocket mode. A user can engage the locking element, for example, the structure to disengage it and enable the user to move or rotate the pocket element, optionally converting the pocket element from the pocket mode to the service mode and vice versa. 
     As shown in  FIGS. 119-121 , the nose assembly  12050 , the pocket element  12070  can include one or more magnetic elements  12059  located adjacent a collated fastener path CFP. The magnetic elements  12059  shown can be of the type described in other embodiments herein. The magnetic elements  12059  can exert a magnetic force on an individual fastener from the collated fasteners, so as to align that individual fastener with an opening  12084  of the guide. This can enable the fastener to enter the opening and subsequently the angled bore of the guide for advancement into the board. Where the fasteners are generally small and/or the bore is small, this can provide reliable alignment for consistent advancement of the fasteners, and can minimize unintentional jamming of the fasteners in the nose assembly  12050 . 
     When associated with the pocket element, the magnetic elements  12059  can be positioned in the back wall  12072 . In this manner, the magnetic elements  12072  generally can be positioned in and can obstruct the collated fastener path CFP. This can enable the magnetic elements  12059  to hold the individual fastener centered between the exterior surface  12067  and the side wall  12073 , or generally centered over the opening  12084  to the bore  12088 . In this manner, the fastener can be consistently aligned with and enter the bore. Optionally, the magnetic elements can be perfectly centered in the collated fastener path CFP, and generally equidistant from the exterior surface and the side wall. This configuration can assist in alignment of the individual fasteners with the bore  12088  and its axis  12400 . 
     Although a variety of magnet configurations and number of magnets can be used, optionally, the magnetic elements  12059  can include first and second magnets. The magnetic elements  12059  can be located in the back wall  12072 , generally one above the other in relation to the angled bore  12088  and opening  12084 , adjacent the guide pocket  12069 . The first magnet can exert a magnetic force on an upper portion of the individual fastener, and the second magnet can exert another magnetic force on a lower portion of the individual fastener. Collectively, these two forces can align the individual fastener with the opening  12084  and/or the axis  12400 . Of course, more or fewer magnets can be used to align the fastener. 
     With the magnetic elements positioned in the back wall  12072 , the magnetic elements also can move when the pocket element  12070  transitions between the pocket mode and service mode. For example, the magnetic elements  12059  can be pivoted generally parallel to and/or within with the collated fastener path CFP, but downward out of the way of the individual fasteners as shown in  FIG. 121 . In this manner, when the pocket element  12070  is in the service mode, the magnetic elements  12059  are removed a distance away from the collated fastener path CFP so that they do not attract or move the fasteners with the associated magnetic forces. Of course, the magnetic elements can be positioned and included in any of the other components, for example the side wall and/or the exterior surface depending on the application. 
     While the magnetic elements work well with fasteners including iron, there are some fasteners that do not include iron or are not affected by magnetic forces. Stainless steel screws are an example. With the guide pocket  12069  of the tool  12060 , however, this is not too problematic because that pocket again substantially surrounds optionally at least 50%, further optionally at least 65%, even further optionally at least 75% of the circumference of the fastener, so the fastener is adequately constrained to rotate in a small area or volume. The fastener also can be surrounded by three “sides” of the pocket, which also aids in the rotational constraining of the fastener. 
     Further, the alignment projection and foot of the tool set the nose assembly, and thus the guide pocket, at a non-vertical angle, for example, any of the angles described in connection with the other embodiments herein. As a result, when the fastener is non-ferrous, it still lays in the guide pocket under the force of gravity, which can also assist in enabling the guide pocket to rotationally constrain the fastener. 
     XXI. Seventeenth Alternative Tool and Method Embodiment 
     A seventeenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool and related method is illustrated in  FIGS. 122-125  and generally designated  13060 . This embodiment, like the embodiments above, can be well suited for use with shrinkable boards or other types of boards as described herein. Moreover, this embodiment is well suited for the types of fasteners in the embodiments described herein, as well as any other type of fasteners. For example, the tool can be used to advance the side angle fasteners  10 ,  110 ,  21 ,  310  at the respective advanced orientations and using the techniques herein, and/or conventional pointed-tip fasteners. 
     The installation tool of the seventeenth alternative embodiment also is similar in construction and operation to the embodiments described herein with several exceptions. For example the seventeenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool can be for use in advancing individual fasteners, one at time, into a side surface and/or corner of a board, for example, a shrinkable board, as described in conjunction with the embodiments of the other fasteners and tools herein. 
     The seventeenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool  13060  can include the elongated shaft  13062 , guide  13080 , alignment projection  13090 , shaft bore  13063 A, guide bore  13088  and other features of the eleventh, twelfth and fifteenth embodiments of the installation tools  7060 ,  8060  and  11060  described herein. The tool can include a drive element  13014  that is reciprocally mounted within one or both of the shaft bore  13063 A and bore  13088  of the elongated shaft and guide, and that moves relative to the shaft, guide and/or alignment projection. 
     Turning to  FIGS. 122-125 , the tool  13060  can include a primary housing or sleeve  13017  mounted to and/or joined with a secondary housing or sleeve  13016 . The primary housing  13017  can include ergonomic contours to enhance a user&#39;s grip on the tool, preventing it from rotating when it is joined with a driving tool and when a fastener is being advanced by the tool. The primary housing  13017  can include a lower surface  13019  which can be configured to engage the upper surface of the substrate during a fastener advancing operation. This lower surface, also referred to as a substrate engaging surface  13019 , can be generally positioned around at least a portion of the guide  13080  and/or the alignment projection  13090 . The substrate engaging surface  13019  generally can be flush or slightly recessed above or below the forward and rearward engagement surfaces  13069  and  13068  that are located forward and rearward of the alignment projection as described in connection with other embodiments herein. 
     Like the fifteenth embodiment, the primary housing  13017  can further house an elongated shaft  13062  which defines the shaft bore  13063 A as well as a portion of the guide  13080  which defines the angled bore  13088 . The primary housing  13017  can also house a bias element  13018 A to urge the secondary housing  13016  to the generally opened or extended mode as shown in  FIG. 124 . This extended mode is sufficient to move the drive element  13014 , in particular the drive element head  13014 H, within the angled bore  13088  and/or shaft bore  13063 A so that a fastener can be positioned in the same, substantially entirely within one or both of those bores, with or without protruding beyond the second opening  13085 . Generally, the bias member can operate the same as the bias member in the fifteenth embodiment, and can include the same structure. 
     As shown in  FIG. 124 , the elongated shaft member  13062  defines a shaft bore  13063 A that is generally aligned with and forms an extension of the angled bore  13088  defined by the guide  13080 . The guide and elongated shaft can be an integral, monolithic part as shown, or they can be separately constructed components, depending on the particular application. Generally the shaft bore is configured to receive the drive element  13014 . Because the shaft bore and angled bore can be contiguous, the angled bore can also receive the drive element during an advancing operation. Indeed, the drive element and drive head or drive feature can both be rotated and reciprocally extended and/or retracted there through. 
     The elongated shaft member  13062  can be modified from the shaft member of the fifteenth embodiment. In particular, the shaft bore  13063 A can be of a greater dimension than the angled bore  13080 . For example, the shaft bore portion  13062 B optionally can have a diameter B 1 , which is greater than the diameter B 2  of the angled bore  13088  by at least 1%, 5% or 10%. This can enable the fastener head to engage the wall  13062 W of the bore portion  13062 B so that the drive element head  13014  can enter and engage a drive feature on the fastener head more easily. In addition, the different dimensions of the bore portions  13063 A and  13063 B create a shoulder  13063 S in the bore. Where the tool  13060  has fully driven a fastener, for example, as shown in  FIG. 125 , this shoulder can operate to stop advancement of the drive element  13014  by way of the shoulder  13014 S of the drive element engaging the shoulder  13063 S in the bore. This can effectively capture the drive element so that it does not eject from the tool. The engagement also can set the depth to which the fastener is driven in an underlying substrate. 
     Optionally, the shoulder  13063 S can operate to help in capturing the head of a fastener, preventing it from easily falling out of the bore. In some cases, where a magnet is included in the bore, the shoulder also can operate to provide an audible “click” when the fastener is sufficiently installed in the bore. 
     Further optionally, the opening  13063 C to the shaft bore can be modified to include a chamfered or rounded surface so that the drive element head  13014 H can more easily enter the shaft bore when the tool is disassembled and reassembled or otherwise serviced. 
     The elongated shaft  13062  and/or guide  13080  can be outfitted with one or more magnetic elements that can be configured in close proximity to the shaft bore  13063 A and/or angled bore  13088 . As an example, the shaft bore portion  13063 B can include first and second magnets  13066 A and  130668 . These elements can be aligned with one another, optionally one above the other, along a common plane. The first magnet  13066 A can exert a first magnetic force on the head  13014 H of the drive element, and the second magnet  13066 B can exert a second magnetic force on the head of a fastener  13010  placed in the tool. The first magnet can align the head  13014 H of the drive element and the head of the fastener along the common plane. In turn, this can ensure that the drive element head consistently and cleanly enters the drive feature of the fastener head, even when the drive element and its head are rotating relative bore, and entering the initially non-rotating fastener head. Further, where different fasteners having different sized heads are used in the same tool, regardless of the size of those heads, the magnets can repeatedly and consistently align the head of the drive element with the drive feature of the fastener. 
     As shown in  FIG. 124 , the upper portion  13014 T of the drive element  13014  can be moveably mounted within the socket  13026 . For example, the while the socket can retain the upper portion  13014 T, it does so somewhat loosely, so that the drive element can pivot slightly about the upper portion  13014 T, in some cases misaligning with the axis  13400  so that the drive element is no longer parallel with that axis. In such cases, the head  13014 H can be offset from the axis while in the bore  13063 B. This enables the head  13014 H of the drive element to engage the wall  13062 W of the bore, and generally align with the drive feature of the head of the fastener  13010 . However, when the head  13014 H of the drive element enters the angled bore  13088 , the drive element is realigned and generally concentrically rotated about the axis  13400 . 
     Operation of the tool  13060  is similar to that of the twelfth, thirteenth and fifteenth embodiments described above. Suffice it to say that a driving tool is attached to the tool bit  13015 . A fastener  13010  is placed in the angled bore  13088  and/or shaft bore  13063 A. The magnet  13066 B magnetically attracts the head of the fastener to the wall  13062 W, optionally in a plane. The alignment projection  13090  is positioned adjacent a bore with the second opening  13085  facing the side surface and/or corner of a board, and with the forward surface  13069  facing an upper surface of the board. The driving tool is operated to rotate the bit  13015 , which in turn rotates the drive element  13014 . The head  13014 H is attracted to the wall  13062 W. The head  13014 H engages the fastener head and in particular its drive element, optionally in the common plane, and starts to rotate the fastener. The magnets assist in the alignment of the head  13014 H and the head of the fastener  13010  in the common plane. 
     The user applies a force and can hold the primary housing  13017  to prevent it from rotating. The drive element  13014  is pushed downward within the shaft bore and the angled bore. The fastener advances out of the second opening  13085  and into a board (not shown). The bias member  13018 A compresses and the secondary body  13016  moves down a distance until the shoulders  13014 S and  13063 S engage one another, providing tactile feedback to inform a user that the fastener is fully advanced, so the tool can be moved to a new fastener advancement position. 
     When the user begins to disengage the tool, and the previously applied force is removed, the bias member  13018 A urges the secondary housing  13016  from a retracted to the extended mode shown in  FIG. 124 . The driving head  13014 H moves upward within the shaft bore  13063 A,  13063 B and/or angled bore  13088 , away from the opening  13085 , so that another fastener can be placed in the bore for another installation procedure. The magnet  13066 A holds the head of the drive element adjacent the wall  13063 W. 
     XXII. Eighteenth Alternative Tool and Method Embodiment 
     An eighteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool and related method is illustrated in  FIGS. 126-135  and generally designated  14060 . This embodiment, like the embodiments above, can be well suited for use with shrinkable boards, or other types of boards as described herein. Moreover, this embodiment is well suited for types of fasteners in the embodiments described herein as well as any other type of fasteners. For example, the tool can be used to advance the side angled fasteners  10 ,  110 ,  210 ,  310  at the respective advancement orientations and using the techniques herein and/or conventional pointed tip fasteners. The installation tool of the eighteenth alternative embodiment also is similar in construction and operation to the embodiments described herein with several exceptions. 
     For example, turning to  FIGS. 126-135 , the eighteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener tool  14060  generally includes a feed mechanism  14032  and a nose assembly  14050 . A guide  14080  and an alignment projection  14090  are included in the nose assembly. A foot  14051  extends forwardly from the nose assembly. The eighteenth alternative embodiment also includes a driving tool  14010 . All these components can be similar in structure and function to that in the alternative embodiments herein, for example, at least the tools of the eighth, ninth, tenth and thirteenth alternative embodiments. Accordingly, all of the aspects, features, structure and function of those embodiments can apply similarly to this embodiment and therefore will not be described again in detail. 
     As shown in  FIG. 126 , the nose assembly  14050  can also include a pocket element  14070  to define a guide pocket  14069 , similar to the pocket element described in connection with the sixteenth embodiment above. Indeed, the components can have the same structure and function, and therefore will not be described again here in detail. 
     Further, the operation of the nose assembly, the guide  14080 , the projection  14090 , as well as the foot  14051  can similar to that of the thirteenth alternative embodiment, particularly the engagement of the tool with the board shown in  FIG. 71-79 . Accordingly, all of the aspects, features, structure and function of those embodiments can apply similarly to this embodiment and therefore will not be described again in detail. 
     The feed mechanism, also referred to as a feed, can be any conventional feed mechanism capable of sequentially advancing collated fasteners  14907  from a holder or container  14040  to the nose assembly  14050 . Examples of suitable feed mechanisms for collated fasteners are the Grabber® Super Drive Model 05, 55 or 75 Series, the Grip-Rite® collated screw gun attachment, or the P13KUE autofeed tool, all of which are referred to in connection with the eighth alternative embodiment above. These feed mechanisms are generally capable of advancing a collated strip  14907  having multiple individual fasteners  14910  associated therewith to the nose assembly upon compression of or general reduction of the dimension of the feed mechanism  14032 . Typically, the feed mechanism includes a compression spring  14031  which compresses when a force is transmitted through the feeding mechanism via some other structure associated with the tool  14060 . The feed mechanism can include a rebound spring or other element  14033  that can assist in resetting the feed mechanism. The feed mechanism also includes multiple structures, such as gears, levers and linkage, which advance the collated fasteners  14907  toward the nose assembly when the primary housing  14036  and secondary housing  14037  are moved relative to one another and/or inside one another. The collated fasteners  14907  and related strip of material used to hold the collated fasteners can be of the type generally described in connection with the thirteenth alternative embodiment above or any other embodiments described herein. 
     With reference to  FIGS. 127 and 132 , the tool  14060  includes a feed extension  14020  that extends upwardly away from the feed mechanism  14032 . The feed extension  14020  can be an elongated bar of tubular shape, optionally hollow, and virtually of any geometric cross section. The feed extension can be of a length sufficient to enable the user of the installation tool  14060  to grasp the driving tool  14010  and stand up right while installing fasteners in a board at a lower level, for example, in a board that is at or near a user&#39;s feet or some other distance from a user&#39;s hands. Generally, the driving tool  14010  can be a cordless or electricity powered drill or other device capable of rotating fasteners. 
     The feed extension  14020  is generally fixedly secured relative to the primary housing  14036 . Thus, the feed extension  14020  and the primary housing  14036  are movable toward and relative to the nose assembly  14050 , and more generally, to the components thereof and/or a board or substrate  14102  on which the tool  14060  is used to install a fastener. The feed extension  14020  can include a handle  14012  attached to it. The handle  14012  can generally be ergonomically configured so that a user can grasp the handle and apply a downward force F 38  ( FIG. 128 ) which can be transferred to the feed mechanism or generally to the tool as described further below. The handle  14012  can be joined directly to the feed extension  14020  or offset with a bracket  14012 B that can be moved to accommodate the user&#39;s preferences or stature. 
     A drive extension  14016  can be reciprocally and/or telescopingly mounted to the feed extension  14020 . For example, the drive extension  14016  can be of a smaller cross sectional dimension than the feed extension  14020  and can fit within the internal bore of the feed extension  14020 . The drive extension  14016  can be immovably, fixedly and/or nonrotatably secured to the driving tool  14010 . Generally, the drive extension  14016  houses and encloses a drive element  14014  within the drive extension  14016  to shield a user from contact with it. The drive element  14014  can also extend through the feed extension  14020  downward to the nose assembly, where it can engage advance fasteners as with any of the similar to the drive elements of any of the other embodiments described herein. 
     Returning to  FIGS. 127 and 132 , the movement of the drive extension  14016  relative to the feed extension  14020  can be regulated by a pin or other element  14017  that slides within the confines of a slot  14019 . Generally the ends of the slot  14019  can engage the pin  14017  to limit the movement of the drive extension  14016  relative to the feed extension  14020 . The pin and slot can limit the reciprocating movement of the drive element  14014  within the feed extension  14020 . The pin and slot further can prevent the feed extension  14016  from being withdrawn from the feed extension  14020  unintentionally. 
     The feed extension  14020  and drive extension  14016  can be outfitted with a locking element  14018 . This locking element can be a simple threaded element that threads through the feed extension  14020  and engages the drive extension  14016 . By tightening the locking element  14018 , the drive extension  14016  can be secured in a fixed position and spatial orientation relative to the feed extension  14020 . The locking element can enable the tool to operate in first and second modes as described in further detail below. Further optionally, the locking element can be a variety of structures or mechanism that can secure the drive extension  14016  immovably to the feed extension  14020 . For example, the threaded element can be replaced with a cam, a collet, a clamp or any other construction. 
     As mentioned above, the locking element  14018  shown in  FIG. 127  can configure the installation tool  14060  in a first mode or a second mode. Of course, the locking element  14018  can be absent from the tool all together, in which case, the installation tool remains in one of the two modes. 
     In the second mode, the locking element  14018  locks the drive extension  14016  in fixed relation to the feed extension  14020 . More generally, the drive tool  14010  is fixed in a stationary location or position relative to the feed mechanism  14032 . In this mode, the drive element  14014  is non-reciprocally mounted in the feed extension  14020 , however, the drive element can rotate within the extension  14020 . Optionally, the drive head  14014 H of the drive element  14014  is at a fixed distance from the handle  14012  and/or the end  14020 E of the extension  14020  or some other structure associated therewith. In this locked configuration of the second mode, the drive tool and drive element move with the primary housing  14036  of the feed mechanism  14032 , and generally move with the feed mechanism  14032  when advancing a fastener toward the board  14102  or through the nose assembly  14050 . 
     This second mode of operation is similar to the modes of operation of the eighth, ninth, tenth and thirteenth embodiments described above. Generally, when the driving operation fastener is completed, the feed mechanism, the feed extension  14020 , drive extension  14016 , drive element  14014  and driving tool  14010  retract or extend or move away from the nose assembly  14050  and the board  14102 . 
     In the second mode, when a user exerts a force F 40  as shown in  FIG. 131  on the handle  14012 , both the drive element  14014  and the feed mechanism  14032  move toward the nose assembly  14050  and more generally toward the board  14102 , optionally simultaneously. In some cases, particularly with regard to boards constructed from plastic, synthetics or hardwoods, this motion can cause the fastener to inconsistently engage the board, float within the nose assembly and/or inadvertently deflect off the corner and/or side surface into which the fastener is advanced. This can lead to inconsistent advancing of the fasteners and can damage the board or lead to an unsatisfactory fastener installation. Further, many times the user cannot apply a controlled and/or consistent amount of force, or otherwise cannot incrementally apply a desired amount of force F 40  because part of the force is used to move or press the feed mechanism  14032  and/or the spring associated therewith. This, again, can lead to inconsistent or unsatisfactory advancement of the fastener into these types of boards. Of course, where the substrate is a soft wood, such as treated lumber, the tool shown in the modes of  FIGS. 130 and 131  can work satisfactorily due to the softness of the wood and the fastener being less prone to deflect from the surface of the soft wood. 
     The locking element, as mentioned above, also configures the installation tool in a first mode. In the first mode, the installation tool is operable in a two step procedure. In the first step, the drive tool remains stationary relative to the feed mechanism but moves toward the nose assembly when a force is transferred through the extension to the feed mechanism. In the first step, the drive element moves toward the nose assembly but does not engage the fastener and the collated fastener strip  14907 . In this first step, a force applied to the handle  14012  transfers through the extension  14020  and feed mechanism  14032  to firmly and consistently engage the nose assembly, for example, the guide  14080  and optional foot  14051  against the respective side surfaces, corner and/or upper surface of the board  14102 . 
     In the second step, after the feed mechanism is fully actuated, and optionally the spring associated therewith is compressed, or the feed mechanism is bottomed out, the driving tool and associated drive element are separately and independently moved relative to the feed mechanism. The drive tool moves toward the guide and generally toward the board while the feel mechanism remains stationary relative to the nose assembly. In this step, the drive element engages an individual fastener, breaks it loose from the collated strip, and advances it into the board. 
     Referring to  FIG. 127 , the locking element  14018  is configured so the installation tool  14060  is in the first mode. In that first mode, the drive element generally is operable in a primary mode and a secondary mode. In the primary mode, the drive element  14014  remains stationary relative to the feed mechanism  14032 , but moves toward the nose assembly  14080  upon transfer of a force F 38  to the handle  14012 . Generally, the drive element can rotate relative to the nose assembly  14050  or other structure of the tool but still remain “stationary” relative to the feed mechanism. By this use of the word stationary is meant that the drive element does not advance toward or away from the feed mechanism, but may or may not rotate about an axis. 
     The drive element  14014  also is operable in the secondary mode while the tool is in the first mode. In the secondary mode, the drive element is separately and independently moveable relative to the feed mechanism  14032  so that the drive element  14014  moves toward the nose assembly, the guide, angled bore and/or the board while the feed mechanism  14032  remains stationary and/or in a fixed unmoving position, optionally relative to the nose assembly or the components thereof and/or the board  14102 . 
     More specifically, as shown in  FIG. 127 , the tool is in the first mode and the drive element  14014  is in the primary mode. The tool  14060  is initially brought against the board  14102 . The alignment projection  14090  and foot  14051  engage the side surface, corner and/or upper surface of the board  14102  as described in connection with other embodiments herein. The angled bore  14088  is aligned with the corner and/or side surface for a driving operation and alignment of features of the nose assembly, foot and alignment projection. However, the user may desire to apply additional force. In so doing, with reference to  FIG. 128  a force F 38  is applied to the handle  14012 . That force F 38  is transferred through the feed extension  14020  to the feed mechanism  14032 . As a result, the feed mechanism  14032  presses generally with the primary housing and the secondary housing moving toward one another, the spring compressing, and the feed mechanism  14032  eventually bottoming out. An individual fastener from the collated fastener strip  14907  can be advanced during this operation to ready that individual fastener for advancement into the nose assembly  14050 . Generally, the feed mechanism moves a distance D 13  toward the nose assembly  14050  and/or the board  14102  in this primary mode. While the drive extension  14020 , the drive element  14014  and the driving tool  14010  also move this distance D 13 , these elements generally do not move toward the feed mechanism, nor do they move any closer to the collated fastener strip  14907  or any individual fastener thereof. In this manner, the drive element head  14014 H does not engage individual fasteners. 
     With the nose assembly  14050  adequately aligned with the board  14102  and a first force F 38  applied, the user can continue to apply that force and begin advancement of the fastener. The drive element is then operated in the secondary mode, in which it is separately and independently moved relative to the feed mechanism  14032 . Again, the feed mechanism  14032  has ceased its movement. In the secondary mode, another force F 39  can be applied directly to the driving tool  14010  and thus to the drive element  14014 . The drive element  14014  and the drive head  14014 H move toward the nose assembly  14050 , the guide  14080  and generally the board  14102 . In this operation, the drive element head  14014 H engages an individual fastener from the collated fasteners  14907  and pushes it or removes it from the collated fastener strip. The fastener enters the angled bore  14088 . The drive element  14014  can continue to move and advance the fastener into the board  14102 , for example, the corner and/or side surface as described in connection with any of the other embodiments above. All while this occurs, the alignment projection  14090  and the foot  14051  remain engaged with the side surface, corner and/or upper surface of the board  14102 , respectively. The drive element  14014  can advance until the fastener is sufficiently advanced with the board. 
     After the fastener is sufficiently installed in the board  14102 , the forces F 39  and F 38  can be removed. Another force F 41  can be applied to the drive tool and/or the handle to withdraw the drive extension  14016  from the feed extension  14020 . Another force F 42  can be applied to the handle  14012  to disengage the nose assembly, and the tool in general, from the board  14102  to ready the tool for the installation of another fastener. In so doing, the drive element  14014 H head is removed from the angled bore  14088  and generally the nose assembly  14050 . It also moves within the feed extension  14020 . The nose assembly  14050  can be removed and disengaged from the board  14102  to ready it for advancement of the next fastener. This process can be repeated multiple times to install multiple fasteners. 
       FIGS. 132-135  generally illustrate the two-step process of the tool first mode from a different perspective. As shown in  FIG. 132 , the nose assembly  14050  is initially brought into engagement with the corner and/or side surface of the board  14102 . The angled bore can be aligned with the corner and/or side surface. As shown in  FIG. 133 , a force F 38  can be applied to the handle  14012 . This force is transmitted through the feed extension  14020  to operate the feed mechanism  14032 . The feed mechanism  14032  compresses or reduces in size until it bottoms out and the force F 38  is transferred to the nose assembly  14050  to sufficiently engage the tool against the board  14102  with a desired amount of force and/or pressure. At this point however, the drive element has not begun to engage the fastener. 
     As shown in  FIG. 134 , another force F 39  is applied to the drive tool  14010 . This moves the drive element into engagement with the collated strip, optionally removing an individual fastener from the strip and pushing it through the nose assembly  14050  to engage the board. As shown in FIG.  135 , the drive tool  14010  continues to operate the drive element and drive or advance the fastener into the board, all while the nose assembly  14050  remains sufficiently engaged with the board. 
     XXIII. Nineteenth Alternative Tool and Method Embodiment 
     A nineteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool and related method is illustrated in  FIGS. 137-138  and generally designated  15060 . This embodiment, like the embodiments herein, can be well suited for use with any type of work pieces or boards, including shrinkable boards, porch boards or tongue and groove boards as described in connection with the tools and methods the third alternative embodiment, the fourth alternative embodiment, and/or the fifth alternative embodiment described herein. For example, the tool can be used to advance the side angled fasteners  10 ,  110 ,  210 ,  310  at the respective advancement orientations using the techniques herein and/or conventional pointed tip fasteners. 
     As shown in  FIG. 138 , the tool and method can be used to install work pieces formed as what is conventionally known as “porch boards” or generally a board that includes a tongue-and-groove construction, where the tongue of one board is adapted to insert and be received by the corresponding groove defined by the side of an adjacent, similar board to enhance continuity between the boards and their connection to one another and/or an underlying substrate. 
     Referring to  FIG. 138 , the work piece  15602  is generally identical to the work piece  602  shown in the third alternative embodiment of the installation tool discussion above. Briefly, the work piece includes a side surface  15608  having a tongue  15601  that extends outwardly from the side surface  15608 . The tongue has a tongue upper surface  15604  that intersects the board&#39;s side surface  15608  at a corner  15603 . Again, this construction of the board can be similar to that described with any other porch boards or tongue and groove boards herein. 
     The tool and method of the nineteenth alternative embodiment also is similar in construction and operation to the embodiments described herein with several exceptions. For example, the nineteenth alternative embodiment of the fastener installation tool can be used to advance individual fasteners, one at a time, into a side surface and/or corner of a board, for example a porch board or a tongue and groove board. 
     The nineteenth alternative embodiment of a fastener installation tool  15060  can include an elongated shaft  15062 , a guide  15080  and one or more alignment projections  15090 , a shaft bore  15063 A, a guide bore  15088  and any other features of the eleventh, twelfth, fifteenth and seventeenth embodiments of the installation tools  7060 ,  8060 ,  11060  and  13060  described herein. The tool can include a rotatable drive element  15014  that is reciprocally and rotatably mounted within one or more of the shaft bore  15063 A and the bore  15088  of the elongated shaft and guide. The drive element, virtually identical to the eleventh, twelfth, fifteenth and seventeenth elements, can move relative to the shaft, guide and/or alignment projections  15090  and can rotate. 
     The installation tool  15060  can also include a primary housing or sleeve  15017  and a secondary housing  15016  which are configured and operate like those features in the above noted embodiments. The primary housing  15017  can include forward facing foot  15051  that extends forward of the guide  15000 . The housing  15017  also can include a lower surface  15019  which can be configured to engage the upper surface  15611  of a board during a fastener advancing operation. The lower surface  15019 , also referred to as the substrate engaging surface, can generally be positioned around all or at least a portion of the guide  15080  and/or the at least one alignment projection  15090 . The substrate engaging surface  15019  generally can be flush or slightly recessed above or below the forward and rearward engagement surfaces  15069  and  15068 . 
     The guide  15080  and elongated shaft  15062  are substantially identical to that in the seventeenth alternative embodiment above and therefore will not be described in further detail here. The at least one alignment projection  15090  however, is somewhat different from that in the seventeenth alternative embodiment. For example, the at least one alignment projection  15090  can include a pair of generally cylindrical projections extending downwardly from the lower surface of the guide  15080 . The angled bore  15088 , and in particular, the opening  15085  of the angled bore can be aligned between the individual ones of the pair of the alignment projections  15090 . In this configuration, the fastener is ejected generally between the individual alignment projections  15090 . In this manner, it can traverse into a corner  15603  of the work piece  15602 . Optionally, the guide and tool of this embodiment does not include a material ejection port. Instead, the one or more alignment projections are sized and shaped so that material bored from a hole due to the advancement of the fastener simply dumps out, adjacent the hole, rather than being carried up a portion of the guide and/or angled bore. 
     The alignment projections  15090  are shown as each including an inner engagement surface  15092  and an outer engagement surface  15093 . The inner engagement surface  15092  generally engages the side surface  15608  of the board  15602  as shown in  FIG. 138  during installation. The outer engagement surface  15093  does not engage a portion of the board itself, for example the tongue  15601  and/or the side surface  15608  or the corner  15603 . The alignment projection can be of a depth D 22  extending from the bottom surface  15069  of the tool  15060 . This depth D 22  can be preselected so that it is less than the overall distance from the upper surface  15611  of the board to the upper surface  15604  of the tongue  15601 . Generally, this enables the bottom surface  15069  to engage the upper surface  15611  of the board  15602  without tilting at an abnormal angle. 
     As shown in  FIG. 137 , the opening  15085  of the angled bore  15088  opens at the bottom surface of the guide  15080 . Optionally, the alignment projections  15090  do not include any part of or define the second opening  15085 . Accordingly, the alignment projections  15090  do not rotationally constrain a fastener advancing out of the opening  15085  or the guide in general. This construction is suitable for tongue and groove boards because the fastener, as it advances is generally guided and rotationally constrained by and aligned with the corner  15603  of the board, by the side surface  15608  and the upper surface  15604  of the tongue  15601 . The alignment projections  15090  do not include other structure to guide the screw into that location because the screw is naturally guided by the work piece or board itself. 
     The operation and method of use of this installation tool  15060  is substantially identical to any of the eleventh, twelfth, fifteenth and seventeenth embodiments herein, and therefore will not be described again here in detail. One exception is that the engagement of the tool with the work piece more closely resembles the engagement of the tools the associated with the porch boards, in particular the third, fourth and fifth embodiments of tools and methods described above. 
     The above description is that of current embodiments. Various alterations and changes can be made without departing from the spirit and broader aspects of the invention as defined in the appended claims, which are to be interpreted in accordance with the principles of patent law including the doctrine of equivalents. This disclosure is presented for illustrative purposes and should not be interpreted as an exhaustive description of all embodiments of the invention or to limit the scope of the claims to the specific elements illustrated or described in connection with these embodiments. For example, and without limitation, any individual element(s) of the described invention may be replaced by alternative elements that provide substantially similar functionality or otherwise provide adequate operation. This includes, for example, presently known alternative elements, such as those that might be currently known to one skilled in the art, and alternative elements that may be developed in the future, such as those that one skilled in the art might, upon development, recognize as an alternative. Further, the disclosed embodiments include a plurality of features that are described in concert and that might cooperatively provide a collection of benefits. The present invention is not limited to only those embodiments that include all of these features or that provide all of the stated benefits, except to the extent otherwise expressly set forth in the issued claims. Any reference to claim elements in the singular, for example, using the articles “a,” “an,” “the” or “said,” is not to be construed as limiting the element to the singular. Any reference to claim elements as “at least one of X, Y and Z” is meant to include any one of X, Y or Z individually, and any combination of X, Y and Z, for example, X, Y, Z; X, Y; X, Z; and Y, Z.